Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf64-s390.c revision 1.1.1.7
      1      1.1     skrll /* IBM S/390-specific support for 64-bit ELF
      2  1.1.1.6  christos    Copyright (C) 2000-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3      1.1     skrll    Contributed Martin Schwidefsky (schwidefsky (at) de.ibm.com).
      4      1.1     skrll 
      5      1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
      6      1.1     skrll 
      7      1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
      8      1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
      9      1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     10      1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     11      1.1     skrll 
     12      1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     13      1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     14      1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     15      1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     16      1.1     skrll 
     17      1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     18      1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     19      1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
     20      1.1     skrll    02110-1301, USA.  */
     21      1.1     skrll 
     22      1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     23      1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     24      1.1     skrll #include "bfdlink.h"
     25      1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     26      1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     27      1.1     skrll #include "elf/s390.h"
     28  1.1.1.6  christos #include "elf-s390.h"
     29  1.1.1.6  christos #include <stdarg.h>
     30      1.1     skrll 
     31      1.1     skrll /* In case we're on a 32-bit machine, construct a 64-bit "-1" value
     32      1.1     skrll    from smaller values.  Start with zero, widen, *then* decrement.  */
     33      1.1     skrll #define MINUS_ONE      (((bfd_vma)0) - 1)
     34      1.1     skrll 
     35  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     36  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     37  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *, bfd *, char **);
     38  1.1.1.3  christos static bfd_reloc_status_type
     39  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *, arelent *, asymbol *, void *,
     40  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *, bfd *, char **);
     41  1.1.1.3  christos 
     42      1.1     skrll /* The relocation "howto" table.  */
     43      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf_howto_table[] =
     44      1.1     skrll {
     45      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_NONE,		/* type */
     46      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* rightshift */
     47  1.1.1.4  christos 	 3,			/* size (0 = byte, 1 = 2 byte, 2 = 4 byte) */
     48      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitsize */
     49      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE,			/* pc_relative */
     50      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* bitpos */
     51      1.1     skrll 	 complain_overflow_dont, /* complain_on_overflow */
     52      1.1     skrll 	 bfd_elf_generic_reloc, /* special_function */
     53      1.1     skrll 	 "R_390_NONE",		/* name */
     54      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE,			/* partial_inplace */
     55      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* src_mask */
     56      1.1     skrll 	 0,			/* dst_mask */
     57      1.1     skrll 	 FALSE),		/* pcrel_offset */
     58      1.1     skrll 
     59  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_8,	 0, 0,	8, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     60  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_8",	 FALSE, 0,0x000000ff, FALSE),
     61  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_12,	 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
     62  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_12",	 FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
     63  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_16,	 0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     64  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_16",	 FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
     65  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     66  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_32",	 FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
     67      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC32,	 0, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     68  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32",	 FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     69      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT12,	 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     70  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT12",	 FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
     71      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     72  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT32",	 FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
     73      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32,	 0, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     74  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32",	 FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     75  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_COPY,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     76  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_COPY",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     77  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GLOB_DAT,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     78      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GLOB_DAT", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     79  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_JMP_SLOT,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     80      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_JMP_SLOT", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     81  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_RELATIVE,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     82      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_RELATIVE", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     83  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     84      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF32", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
     85  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPC,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     86  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPC",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
     87  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOT16,	 0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     88  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT16",	 FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
     89  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC16,	 0, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     90  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16",	 FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     91  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC16DBL,	 1, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     92  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC16DBL",	 FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     93  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT16DBL,	 1, 1, 16,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     94      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT16DBL", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, TRUE),
     95      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC32DBL,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     96  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC32DBL",	 FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     97      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT32DBL,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
     98      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT32DBL", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, TRUE),
     99  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPCDBL,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    100      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPCDBL", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    101  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    102  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_64",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    103      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PC64,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    104  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC64",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    105      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    106  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOT64",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    107      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_PLT64,	 0, 4, 64,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    108  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT64",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    109      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTENT,	 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    110  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTENT",	 FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    111  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF16,	 0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    112      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    113  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTOFF64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    114      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTOFF64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    115      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT12,	 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    116      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT12", FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, FALSE),
    117  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT16,	 0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    118      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    119      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    120      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT32", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
    121      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    122      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    123      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLTENT, 1, 2, 32,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    124      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLTENT",FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  TRUE),
    125  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF16,	 0, 1, 16, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    126      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF16", FALSE, 0,0x0000ffff, FALSE),
    127  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF32,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    128      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF32", FALSE, 0,0xffffffff, FALSE),
    129  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLTOFF64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    130      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLTOFF64", FALSE, 0,MINUS_ONE,  FALSE),
    131      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LOAD, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    132      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LOAD", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    133      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GDCALL, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    134      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GDCALL", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    135      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDCALL, 0, 0, 0, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    136      1.1     skrll 	s390_tls_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDCALL", FALSE, 0, 0, FALSE),
    137      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GD32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GD32.  */
    138  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GD64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    139      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GD64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    140      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE12, 0, 1, 12, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_dont,
    141      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE12", FALSE, 0, 0x00000fff, FALSE),
    142      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_GOTIE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_GOTIE32.  */
    143      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    144      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    145      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDM32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDM32.  */
    146      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDM64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    147      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDM64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    148      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_IE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_IE32.  */
    149  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IE64,	 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    150      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    151      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_IEENT, 1, 2, 32, TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    152      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_IEENT", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, TRUE),
    153      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LE32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LE32.  */
    154  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LE64,	 0, 2, 32, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    155      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LE64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    156      1.1     skrll   EMPTY_HOWTO (R_390_TLS_LDO32),	/* Empty entry for R_390_TLS_LDO32.  */
    157      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_LDO64, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    158      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_LDO64", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    159      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPMOD, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    160      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPMOD", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    161      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_DTPOFF, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    162      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_DTPOFF", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    163      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_TPOFF, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    164      1.1     skrll 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_TLS_TPOFF", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    165  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_20,	 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    166      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_20",      FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    167      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_GOT20,	 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    168      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOT20",   FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    169  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_GOTPLT20,	 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    170      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_GOTPLT20", FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    171      1.1     skrll   HOWTO(R_390_TLS_GOTIE20, 0, 2, 20, FALSE, 8, complain_overflow_dont,
    172      1.1     skrll 	s390_elf_ldisp_reloc, "R_390_TLS_GOTIE20", FALSE, 0,0x0fffff00, FALSE),
    173  1.1.1.3  christos   HOWTO(R_390_IRELATIVE, 0, 4, 64, FALSE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    174  1.1.1.3  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_IRELATIVE", FALSE, 0, MINUS_ONE, FALSE),
    175  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC12DBL,	 1, 1, 12,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    176  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC12DBL",	 FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, TRUE),
    177  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT12DBL,	 1, 1, 12,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    178  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT12DBL", FALSE, 0,0x00000fff, TRUE),
    179  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PC24DBL,	 1, 2, 24,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    180  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PC24DBL",	 FALSE, 0,0x00ffffff, TRUE),
    181  1.1.1.6  christos   HOWTO(R_390_PLT24DBL,	 1, 2, 24,  TRUE, 0, complain_overflow_bitfield,
    182  1.1.1.4  christos 	bfd_elf_generic_reloc, "R_390_PLT24DBL", FALSE, 0,0x00ffffff, TRUE),
    183      1.1     skrll };
    184      1.1     skrll 
    185      1.1     skrll /* GNU extension to record C++ vtable hierarchy.  */
    186      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto =
    187      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT, 0,4,0,FALSE,0,complain_overflow_dont, NULL, "R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT", FALSE,0, 0, FALSE);
    188      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type elf64_s390_vtentry_howto =
    189      1.1     skrll   HOWTO (R_390_GNU_VTENTRY, 0,4,0,FALSE,0,complain_overflow_dont, _bfd_elf_rel_vtable_reloc_fn,"R_390_GNU_VTENTRY", FALSE,0,0, FALSE);
    190      1.1     skrll 
    191      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    192  1.1.1.7  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup (bfd *abfd,
    193  1.1.1.3  christos 			    bfd_reloc_code_real_type code)
    194      1.1     skrll {
    195      1.1     skrll   switch (code)
    196      1.1     skrll     {
    197      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_NONE:
    198      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_NONE];
    199      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_8:
    200      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_8];
    201      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_12:
    202      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_12];
    203      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16:
    204      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_16];
    205      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32:
    206      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    207      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_CTOR:
    208      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_32];
    209      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_PCREL:
    210      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32];
    211      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT12:
    212      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT12];
    213      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOT_PCREL:
    214      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT32];
    215      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32:
    216      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32];
    217      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_COPY:
    218      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_COPY];
    219      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GLOB_DAT:
    220      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GLOB_DAT];
    221      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_JMP_SLOT:
    222      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_JMP_SLOT];
    223      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_RELATIVE:
    224      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_RELATIVE];
    225      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_32_GOTOFF:
    226      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF32];
    227      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPC:
    228      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPC];
    229      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT16:
    230      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT16];
    231      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_PCREL:
    232      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16];
    233  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC12DBL:
    234  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC12DBL];
    235  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT12DBL:
    236  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT12DBL];
    237      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC16DBL:
    238      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC16DBL];
    239      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT16DBL:
    240      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT16DBL];
    241  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC24DBL:
    242  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC24DBL];
    243  1.1.1.4  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT24DBL:
    244  1.1.1.4  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT24DBL];
    245      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PC32DBL:
    246      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC32DBL];
    247      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT32DBL:
    248      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT32DBL];
    249      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPCDBL:
    250      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPCDBL];
    251      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64:
    252      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_64];
    253      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_64_PCREL:
    254      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PC64];
    255      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT64:
    256      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT64];
    257      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLT64:
    258      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLT64];
    259      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTENT:
    260      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTENT];
    261      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_16_GOTOFF:
    262      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF16];
    263      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTOFF64:
    264      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTOFF64];
    265      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT12:
    266      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT12];
    267      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT16:
    268      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT16];
    269      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT32:
    270      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT32];
    271      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT64:
    272      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT64];
    273      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLTENT:
    274      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLTENT];
    275      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF16:
    276      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF16];
    277      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF32:
    278      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF32];
    279      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_PLTOFF64:
    280      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_PLTOFF64];
    281      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LOAD:
    282      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LOAD];
    283      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GDCALL:
    284      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GDCALL];
    285      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDCALL:
    286      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDCALL];
    287      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GD64:
    288      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GD64];
    289      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    290      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE12];
    291      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    292      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE64];
    293      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDM64:
    294      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDM64];
    295      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IE64:
    296      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IE64];
    297      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_IEENT:
    298      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_IEENT];
    299      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LE64:
    300      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LE64];
    301      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_LDO64:
    302      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_LDO64];
    303      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPMOD:
    304      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPMOD];
    305      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_DTPOFF:
    306      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_DTPOFF];
    307      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_TPOFF:
    308      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_TPOFF];
    309      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_20:
    310      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_20];
    311      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOT20:
    312      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOT20];
    313      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_GOTPLT20:
    314      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_GOTPLT20];
    315      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    316      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_TLS_GOTIE20];
    317  1.1.1.3  christos     case BFD_RELOC_390_IRELATIVE:
    318  1.1.1.3  christos       return &elf_howto_table[(int) R_390_IRELATIVE];
    319      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_INHERIT:
    320      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    321      1.1     skrll     case BFD_RELOC_VTABLE_ENTRY:
    322      1.1     skrll       return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    323      1.1     skrll     default:
    324      1.1     skrll       break;
    325      1.1     skrll     }
    326  1.1.1.7  christos 
    327  1.1.1.7  christos   /* xgettext:c-format */
    328  1.1.1.7  christos   _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"), abfd, (int) code);
    329  1.1.1.7  christos   bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    330  1.1.1.7  christos   return NULL;
    331      1.1     skrll }
    332      1.1     skrll 
    333      1.1     skrll static reloc_howto_type *
    334      1.1     skrll elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    335      1.1     skrll 			    const char *r_name)
    336      1.1     skrll {
    337      1.1     skrll   unsigned int i;
    338      1.1     skrll 
    339      1.1     skrll   for (i = 0;
    340      1.1     skrll        i < sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]);
    341      1.1     skrll        i++)
    342      1.1     skrll     if (elf_howto_table[i].name != NULL
    343      1.1     skrll 	&& strcasecmp (elf_howto_table[i].name, r_name) == 0)
    344      1.1     skrll       return &elf_howto_table[i];
    345      1.1     skrll 
    346  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    347  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    348  1.1.1.5  christos   if (strcasecmp (elf64_s390_vtentry_howto.name, r_name) == 0)
    349  1.1.1.5  christos     return &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    350      1.1     skrll 
    351      1.1     skrll   return NULL;
    352      1.1     skrll }
    353      1.1     skrll 
    354      1.1     skrll /* We need to use ELF64_R_TYPE so we have our own copy of this function,
    355      1.1     skrll    and elf64-s390.c has its own copy.  */
    356      1.1     skrll 
    357  1.1.1.7  christos static bfd_boolean
    358  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_info_to_howto (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    359  1.1.1.3  christos 			arelent *cache_ptr,
    360  1.1.1.3  christos 			Elf_Internal_Rela *dst)
    361      1.1     skrll {
    362      1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE(dst->r_info);
    363  1.1.1.7  christos 
    364      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    365      1.1     skrll     {
    366      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
    367      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtinherit_howto;
    368      1.1     skrll       break;
    369      1.1     skrll 
    370      1.1     skrll     case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
    371      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf64_s390_vtentry_howto;
    372      1.1     skrll       break;
    373      1.1     skrll 
    374      1.1     skrll     default:
    375      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= sizeof (elf_howto_table) / sizeof (elf_howto_table[0]))
    376      1.1     skrll 	{
    377  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
    378  1.1.1.7  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: unsupported relocation type %#x"),
    379  1.1.1.7  christos 			      abfd, r_type);
    380  1.1.1.7  christos 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    381  1.1.1.7  christos 	  return FALSE;
    382      1.1     skrll 	}
    383      1.1     skrll       cache_ptr->howto = &elf_howto_table[r_type];
    384      1.1     skrll     }
    385  1.1.1.7  christos   return TRUE;
    386      1.1     skrll }
    387      1.1     skrll 
    388      1.1     skrll /* A relocation function which doesn't do anything.  */
    389      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    390  1.1.1.3  christos s390_tls_reloc (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    391  1.1.1.3  christos 		arelent *reloc_entry,
    392  1.1.1.3  christos 		asymbol *symbol ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    393  1.1.1.3  christos 		void * data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
    394  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *input_section,
    395  1.1.1.3  christos 		bfd *output_bfd,
    396  1.1.1.3  christos 		char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    397      1.1     skrll {
    398      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd)
    399      1.1     skrll     reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    400      1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
    401      1.1     skrll }
    402      1.1     skrll 
    403      1.1     skrll /* Handle the large displacement relocs.  */
    404      1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
    405  1.1.1.3  christos s390_elf_ldisp_reloc (bfd *abfd,
    406  1.1.1.3  christos 		      arelent *reloc_entry,
    407  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asymbol *symbol,
    408  1.1.1.3  christos 		      void * data,
    409  1.1.1.3  christos 		      asection *input_section,
    410  1.1.1.3  christos 		      bfd *output_bfd,
    411  1.1.1.3  christos 		      char **error_message ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
    412      1.1     skrll {
    413      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = reloc_entry->howto;
    414      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma relocation;
    415      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    416      1.1     skrll 
    417      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != (bfd *) NULL
    418      1.1     skrll       && (symbol->flags & BSF_SECTION_SYM) == 0
    419      1.1     skrll       && (! howto->partial_inplace
    420      1.1     skrll 	  || reloc_entry->addend == 0))
    421      1.1     skrll     {
    422      1.1     skrll       reloc_entry->address += input_section->output_offset;
    423      1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_ok;
    424      1.1     skrll     }
    425      1.1     skrll   if (output_bfd != NULL)
    426      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_continue;
    427      1.1     skrll 
    428      1.1     skrll   if (reloc_entry->address > bfd_get_section_limit (abfd, input_section))
    429      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_outofrange;
    430      1.1     skrll 
    431      1.1     skrll   relocation = (symbol->value
    432      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_section->vma
    433      1.1     skrll 		+ symbol->section->output_offset);
    434      1.1     skrll   relocation += reloc_entry->addend;
    435      1.1     skrll   if (howto->pc_relative)
    436      1.1     skrll     {
    437      1.1     skrll       relocation -= (input_section->output_section->vma
    438      1.1     skrll 		     + input_section->output_offset);
    439      1.1     skrll       relocation -= reloc_entry->address;
    440      1.1     skrll     }
    441      1.1     skrll 
    442  1.1.1.4  christos   insn = bfd_get_32 (abfd, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    443      1.1     skrll   insn |= (relocation & 0xfff) << 16 | (relocation & 0xff000) >> 4;
    444      1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (abfd, insn, (bfd_byte *) data + reloc_entry->address);
    445      1.1     skrll 
    446      1.1     skrll   if ((bfd_signed_vma) relocation < - 0x80000
    447      1.1     skrll       || (bfd_signed_vma) relocation > 0x7ffff)
    448      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_overflow;
    449      1.1     skrll   else
    450      1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
    451      1.1     skrll }
    452      1.1     skrll 
    453      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    454  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_is_local_label_name (bfd *abfd, const char *name)
    455      1.1     skrll {
    456      1.1     skrll   if (name[0] == '.' && (name[1] == 'X' || name[1] == 'L'))
    457      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    458      1.1     skrll 
    459      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_is_local_label_name (abfd, name);
    460      1.1     skrll }
    461      1.1     skrll 
    462      1.1     skrll /* Functions for the 390 ELF linker.  */
    463      1.1     skrll 
    464      1.1     skrll /* The name of the dynamic interpreter.  This is put in the .interp
    465      1.1     skrll    section.  */
    466      1.1     skrll 
    467  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld64.so.1"
    468      1.1     skrll 
    469      1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    470      1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    471      1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    472      1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    473      1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    474      1.1     skrll 
    475      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of the first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    476      1.1     skrll #define PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    477      1.1     skrll /* The size in bytes of an entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
    478      1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 32
    479      1.1     skrll 
    480      1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    481      1.1     skrll 
    482  1.1.1.3  christos #define RELA_ENTRY_SIZE sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)
    483  1.1.1.3  christos 
    484      1.1     skrll /* The first three entries in a procedure linkage table are reserved,
    485      1.1     skrll    and the initial contents are unimportant (we zero them out).
    486      1.1     skrll    Subsequent entries look like this.  See the SVR4 ABI 386
    487      1.1     skrll    supplement to see how this works.  */
    488      1.1     skrll 
    489      1.1     skrll /* For the s390, simple addr offset can only be 0 - 4096.
    490      1.1     skrll    To use the full 16777216 TB address space, several instructions
    491      1.1     skrll    are needed to load an address in a register and execute
    492      1.1     skrll    a branch( or just saving the address)
    493      1.1     skrll 
    494      1.1     skrll    Furthermore, only r 0 and 1 are free to use!!!  */
    495      1.1     skrll 
    496      1.1     skrll /* The first 3 words in the GOT are then reserved.
    497      1.1     skrll    Word 0 is the address of the dynamic table.
    498      1.1     skrll    Word 1 is a pointer to a structure describing the object
    499      1.1     skrll    Word 2 is used to point to the loader entry address.
    500      1.1     skrll 
    501      1.1     skrll    The code for PLT entries looks like this:
    502      1.1     skrll 
    503      1.1     skrll    The GOT holds the address in the PLT to be executed.
    504      1.1     skrll    The loader then gets:
    505  1.1.1.5  christos    48(15) =  Pointer to the structure describing the object.
    506  1.1.1.5  christos    56(15) =  Offset in symbol table
    507      1.1     skrll    The loader  must  then find the module where the function is
    508      1.1     skrll    and insert the address in the GOT.
    509      1.1     skrll 
    510      1.1     skrll    PLT1: LARL 1,<fn>@GOTENT # 6 bytes  Load address of GOT entry in r1
    511  1.1.1.6  christos 	 LG   1,0(1)	  # 6 bytes  Load address from GOT in r1
    512  1.1.1.6  christos 	 BCR  15,1	  # 2 bytes  Jump to address
    513  1.1.1.6  christos    RET1: BASR 1,0	  # 2 bytes  Return from GOT 1st time
    514  1.1.1.6  christos 	 LGF  1,12(1)	  # 6 bytes  Load offset in symbl table in r1
    515  1.1.1.6  christos 	 BRCL 15,-x	  # 6 bytes  Jump to start of PLT
    516  1.1.1.6  christos 	 .long ?	  # 4 bytes  offset into .rela.plt
    517      1.1     skrll 
    518      1.1     skrll    Total = 32 bytes per PLT entry
    519      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 2: relative address to GOT entry
    520      1.1     skrll    Fixup at offset 22: relative branch to PLT0
    521  1.1.1.3  christos    Fixup at offset 28: 32 bit offset into .rela.plt
    522      1.1     skrll 
    523  1.1.1.3  christos    A 32 bit offset into the symbol table is enough. It allows for
    524  1.1.1.3  christos    .rela.plt sections up to a size of 2 gigabyte.  A single dynamic
    525  1.1.1.3  christos    object (the main program, any shared library) is limited to 4GB in
    526  1.1.1.3  christos    size.  Having a .rela.plt of 2GB would already make the .plt
    527  1.1.1.3  christos    section bigger than 8GB.  */
    528  1.1.1.3  christos 
    529  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_plt_entry[PLT_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    530  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    531  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* larl    %r1,.	   */
    532  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x04,	    /* lg      %r1,0(%r1)  */
    533  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0xf1,				    /* br      %r1	   */
    534  1.1.1.6  christos     0x0d, 0x10,				    /* basr    %r1,%r0	   */
    535  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x0c, 0x00, 0x14,	    /* lgf     %r1,12(%r1) */
    536  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0xf4, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* jg      first plt   */
    537  1.1.1.6  christos     0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00		    /* .long   0x00000000  */
    538  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    539      1.1     skrll 
    540      1.1     skrll /* The first PLT entry pushes the offset into the symbol table
    541  1.1.1.3  christos    from R1 onto the stack at 56(15) and the loader object info
    542  1.1.1.3  christos    at 48(15), loads the loader address in R1 and jumps to it.  */
    543      1.1     skrll 
    544      1.1     skrll /* The first entry in the PLT:
    545      1.1     skrll 
    546      1.1     skrll   PLT0:
    547      1.1     skrll      STG  1,56(15)  # r1 contains the offset into the symbol table
    548      1.1     skrll      LARL 1,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE # load address of global offset table
    549      1.1     skrll      MVC  48(8,15),8(1) # move loader ino (object struct address) to stack
    550      1.1     skrll      LG   1,16(1)   # get entry address of loader
    551      1.1     skrll      BCR  15,1      # jump to loader
    552      1.1     skrll 
    553      1.1     skrll      Fixup at offset 8: relative address to start of GOT.  */
    554      1.1     skrll 
    555  1.1.1.3  christos static const bfd_byte elf_s390x_first_plt_entry[PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE] =
    556  1.1.1.3  christos   {
    557  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0xf0, 0x38, 0x00, 0x24,	    /* stg     %r1,56(%r15)	 */
    558  1.1.1.6  christos     0xc0, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,	    /* larl    %r1,.		 */
    559  1.1.1.6  christos     0xd2, 0x07, 0xf0, 0x30, 0x10, 0x08,	    /* mvc     48(8,%r15),8(%r1) */
    560  1.1.1.6  christos     0xe3, 0x10, 0x10, 0x10, 0x00, 0x04,	    /* lg      %r1,16(%r1)	 */
    561  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0xf1,				    /* br      %r1		 */
    562  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00,				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    563  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00,				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    564  1.1.1.6  christos     0x07, 0x00				    /* nopr    %r0		 */
    565  1.1.1.3  christos   };
    566      1.1     skrll 
    567      1.1     skrll 
    568      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash entry.  */
    569      1.1     skrll 
    570      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry
    571      1.1     skrll {
    572      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry elf;
    573      1.1     skrll 
    574      1.1     skrll   /* Track dynamic relocs copied for this symbol.  */
    575  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *dyn_relocs;
    576      1.1     skrll 
    577      1.1     skrll   /* Number of GOTPLT references for a function.  */
    578      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma gotplt_refcount;
    579      1.1     skrll 
    580      1.1     skrll #define GOT_UNKNOWN	0
    581      1.1     skrll #define GOT_NORMAL	1
    582      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_GD	2
    583      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE	3
    584      1.1     skrll #define GOT_TLS_IE_NLT	3
    585      1.1     skrll   unsigned char tls_type;
    586  1.1.1.3  christos 
    587  1.1.1.3  christos   /* For pointer equality reasons we might need to change the symbol
    588  1.1.1.3  christos      type from STT_GNU_IFUNC to STT_FUNC together with its value and
    589  1.1.1.3  christos      section entry.  So after alloc_dynrelocs only these values should
    590  1.1.1.3  christos      be used.  In order to check whether a symbol is IFUNC use
    591  1.1.1.3  christos      s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p.  */
    592  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma ifunc_resolver_address;
    593  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *ifunc_resolver_section;
    594      1.1     skrll };
    595      1.1     skrll 
    596      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_hash_entry(ent) \
    597      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    598      1.1     skrll 
    599  1.1.1.3  christos /* This structure represents an entry in the local PLT list needed for
    600  1.1.1.3  christos    local IFUNC symbols.  */
    601  1.1.1.3  christos struct plt_entry
    602  1.1.1.3  christos {
    603  1.1.1.3  christos   /* The section of the local symbol.
    604  1.1.1.3  christos      Set in relocate_section and used in finish_dynamic_sections.  */
    605  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *sec;
    606  1.1.1.3  christos 
    607  1.1.1.3  christos   union
    608  1.1.1.3  christos     {
    609  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    610  1.1.1.3  christos       bfd_vma offset;
    611  1.1.1.3  christos     } plt;
    612  1.1.1.3  christos };
    613  1.1.1.3  christos 
    614      1.1     skrll /* NOTE: Keep this structure in sync with
    615      1.1     skrll    the one declared in elf32-s390.c.  */
    616      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_obj_tdata
    617      1.1     skrll {
    618      1.1     skrll   struct elf_obj_tdata root;
    619      1.1     skrll 
    620  1.1.1.3  christos   /* A local PLT is needed for ifunc symbols.  */
    621  1.1.1.3  christos   struct plt_entry *local_plt;
    622  1.1.1.3  christos 
    623      1.1     skrll   /* TLS type for each local got entry.  */
    624      1.1     skrll   char *local_got_tls_type;
    625      1.1     skrll };
    626      1.1     skrll 
    627      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_tdata(abfd) \
    628      1.1     skrll   ((struct elf_s390_obj_tdata *) (abfd)->tdata.any)
    629      1.1     skrll 
    630  1.1.1.3  christos #define elf_s390_local_plt(abfd) \
    631  1.1.1.3  christos   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_plt)
    632  1.1.1.3  christos 
    633      1.1     skrll #define elf_s390_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    634      1.1     skrll   (elf_s390_tdata (abfd)->local_got_tls_type)
    635      1.1     skrll 
    636      1.1     skrll #define is_s390_elf(bfd)				\
    637      1.1     skrll   (bfd_get_flavour (bfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour	\
    638      1.1     skrll    && elf_tdata (bfd) != NULL				\
    639  1.1.1.2  christos    && elf_object_id (bfd) == S390_ELF_DATA)
    640      1.1     skrll 
    641      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    642      1.1     skrll elf_s390_mkobject (bfd *abfd)
    643      1.1     skrll {
    644      1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_allocate_object (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_s390_obj_tdata),
    645  1.1.1.2  christos 				  S390_ELF_DATA);
    646      1.1     skrll }
    647      1.1     skrll 
    648      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    649  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    650      1.1     skrll {
    651      1.1     skrll   /* Set the right machine number for an s390 elf32 file.  */
    652      1.1     skrll   return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_s390, bfd_mach_s390_64);
    653      1.1     skrll }
    654      1.1     skrll 
    655      1.1     skrll /* s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    656      1.1     skrll 
    657      1.1     skrll struct elf_s390_link_hash_table
    658      1.1     skrll {
    659      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table elf;
    660      1.1     skrll 
    661      1.1     skrll   /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections.  */
    662  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *irelifunc;
    663      1.1     skrll 
    664      1.1     skrll   union {
    665      1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    666      1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    667      1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    668      1.1     skrll 
    669  1.1.1.2  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    670  1.1.1.2  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    671  1.1.1.6  christos 
    672  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Options passed from the linker.  */
    673  1.1.1.6  christos   struct s390_elf_params *params;
    674      1.1     skrll };
    675      1.1     skrll 
    676      1.1     skrll /* Get the s390 ELF linker hash table from a link_info structure.  */
    677      1.1     skrll 
    678  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_s390_hash_table(p)						\
    679  1.1.1.6  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash))	\
    680  1.1.1.6  christos    == S390_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    681      1.1     skrll 
    682  1.1.1.3  christos #define ELF64 1
    683  1.1.1.3  christos #include "elf-s390-common.c"
    684  1.1.1.3  christos 
    685      1.1     skrll /* Create an entry in an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    686      1.1     skrll 
    687      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    688  1.1.1.3  christos link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    689  1.1.1.3  christos 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    690  1.1.1.3  christos 		   const char *string)
    691      1.1     skrll {
    692      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    693      1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    694      1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    695      1.1     skrll     {
    696      1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    697      1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry));
    698      1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    699      1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    700      1.1     skrll     }
    701      1.1     skrll 
    702      1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    703      1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    704      1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    705      1.1     skrll     {
    706      1.1     skrll       struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
    707      1.1     skrll 
    708      1.1     skrll       eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) entry;
    709      1.1     skrll       eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    710      1.1     skrll       eh->gotplt_refcount = 0;
    711      1.1     skrll       eh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    712  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_address = 0;
    713  1.1.1.3  christos       eh->ifunc_resolver_section = NULL;
    714      1.1     skrll     }
    715      1.1     skrll 
    716      1.1     skrll   return entry;
    717      1.1     skrll }
    718      1.1     skrll 
    719      1.1     skrll /* Create an s390 ELF linker hash table.  */
    720      1.1     skrll 
    721      1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    722  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    723      1.1     skrll {
    724      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *ret;
    725      1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table);
    726      1.1     skrll 
    727  1.1.1.4  christos   ret = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *) bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    728      1.1     skrll   if (ret == NULL)
    729      1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    730      1.1     skrll 
    731      1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&ret->elf, abfd, link_hash_newfunc,
    732  1.1.1.2  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry),
    733  1.1.1.2  christos 				      S390_ELF_DATA))
    734      1.1     skrll     {
    735      1.1     skrll       free (ret);
    736      1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    737      1.1     skrll     }
    738      1.1     skrll 
    739      1.1     skrll   return &ret->elf.root;
    740      1.1     skrll }
    741      1.1     skrll 
    742      1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
    743      1.1     skrll 
    744      1.1     skrll static void
    745  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    746  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *dir,
    747  1.1.1.3  christos 			       struct elf_link_hash_entry *ind)
    748      1.1     skrll {
    749      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *edir, *eind;
    750      1.1     skrll 
    751      1.1     skrll   edir = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) dir;
    752      1.1     skrll   eind = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) ind;
    753      1.1     skrll 
    754      1.1     skrll   if (eind->dyn_relocs != NULL)
    755      1.1     skrll     {
    756      1.1     skrll       if (edir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
    757      1.1     skrll 	{
    758  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
    759  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
    760      1.1     skrll 
    761      1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
    762      1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
    763      1.1     skrll 	  for (pp = &eind->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
    764      1.1     skrll 	    {
    765  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *q;
    766      1.1     skrll 
    767      1.1     skrll 	      for (q = edir->dyn_relocs; q != NULL; q = q->next)
    768      1.1     skrll 		if (q->sec == p->sec)
    769      1.1     skrll 		  {
    770      1.1     skrll 		    q->pc_count += p->pc_count;
    771      1.1     skrll 		    q->count += p->count;
    772      1.1     skrll 		    *pp = p->next;
    773      1.1     skrll 		    break;
    774      1.1     skrll 		  }
    775      1.1     skrll 	      if (q == NULL)
    776      1.1     skrll 		pp = &p->next;
    777      1.1     skrll 	    }
    778      1.1     skrll 	  *pp = edir->dyn_relocs;
    779      1.1     skrll 	}
    780      1.1     skrll 
    781      1.1     skrll       edir->dyn_relocs = eind->dyn_relocs;
    782      1.1     skrll       eind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    783      1.1     skrll     }
    784      1.1     skrll 
    785      1.1     skrll   if (ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    786      1.1     skrll       && dir->got.refcount <= 0)
    787      1.1     skrll     {
    788      1.1     skrll       edir->tls_type = eind->tls_type;
    789      1.1     skrll       eind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    790      1.1     skrll     }
    791      1.1     skrll 
    792      1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
    793      1.1     skrll       && ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
    794      1.1     skrll       && dir->dynamic_adjusted)
    795      1.1     skrll     {
    796      1.1     skrll       /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
    797      1.1     skrll 	 of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
    798      1.1     skrll 	 We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS.  */
    799  1.1.1.6  christos       if (dir->versioned != versioned_hidden)
    800  1.1.1.6  christos 	dir->ref_dynamic |= ind->ref_dynamic;
    801      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular |= ind->ref_regular;
    802      1.1     skrll       dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
    803      1.1     skrll       dir->needs_plt |= ind->needs_plt;
    804      1.1     skrll     }
    805      1.1     skrll   else
    806      1.1     skrll     _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, dir, ind);
    807      1.1     skrll }
    808      1.1     skrll 
    809      1.1     skrll static int
    810  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_tls_transition (struct bfd_link_info *info,
    811  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int r_type,
    812  1.1.1.3  christos 			 int is_local)
    813      1.1     skrll {
    814  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
    815      1.1     skrll     return r_type;
    816      1.1     skrll 
    817      1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
    818      1.1     skrll     {
    819      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    820      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    821      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    822      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    823      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_IE64;
    824      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    825      1.1     skrll       if (is_local)
    826      1.1     skrll 	return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    827      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_GOTIE64;
    828      1.1     skrll     case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    829      1.1     skrll       return R_390_TLS_LE64;
    830      1.1     skrll     }
    831      1.1     skrll 
    832      1.1     skrll   return r_type;
    833      1.1     skrll }
    834      1.1     skrll 
    835      1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
    836      1.1     skrll    allocate space in the global offset table or procedure linkage
    837      1.1     skrll    table.  */
    838      1.1     skrll 
    839      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    840  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
    841  1.1.1.2  christos 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
    842  1.1.1.2  christos 		       asection *sec,
    843  1.1.1.2  christos 		       const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
    844      1.1     skrll {
    845      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
    846      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
    847      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
    848      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
    849      1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rel_end;
    850      1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
    851      1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
    852      1.1     skrll   int tls_type, old_tls_type;
    853      1.1     skrll 
    854  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
    855      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    856      1.1     skrll 
    857      1.1     skrll   BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (abfd));
    858      1.1     skrll 
    859      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
    860  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    861  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
    862  1.1.1.2  christos 
    863      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (abfd);
    864      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
    865      1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    866      1.1     skrll 
    867      1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
    868      1.1     skrll 
    869      1.1     skrll   rel_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
    870      1.1     skrll   for (rel = relocs; rel < rel_end; rel++)
    871      1.1     skrll     {
    872      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
    873  1.1.1.6  christos       unsigned int r_symndx;
    874      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
    875  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
    876      1.1     skrll 
    877      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
    878      1.1     skrll 
    879      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= NUM_SHDR_ENTRIES (symtab_hdr))
    880      1.1     skrll 	{
    881  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
    882  1.1.1.7  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: bad symbol index: %d"),
    883  1.1.1.6  christos 			      abfd, r_symndx);
    884      1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    885      1.1     skrll 	}
    886      1.1     skrll 
    887      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
    888  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
    889  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* A local symbol.  */
    890  1.1.1.3  christos 	  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
    891  1.1.1.3  christos 					abfd, r_symndx);
    892  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (isym == NULL)
    893  1.1.1.3  christos 	    return FALSE;
    894  1.1.1.3  christos 
    895  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
    896  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
    897  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *plt;
    898  1.1.1.3  christos 
    899  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    900  1.1.1.3  christos 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    901  1.1.1.3  christos 
    902  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    903  1.1.1.3  christos 		return FALSE;
    904  1.1.1.3  christos 
    905  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
    906  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
    907  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
    908  1.1.1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
    909  1.1.1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    910  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
    911  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt = elf_s390_local_plt (abfd);
    912  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt[r_symndx].plt.refcount++;
    913  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
    914  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h = NULL;
    915  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
    916      1.1     skrll       else
    917      1.1     skrll 	{
    918      1.1     skrll 	  h = sym_hashes[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
    919      1.1     skrll 	  while (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
    920      1.1     skrll 		 || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
    921      1.1     skrll 	    h = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) h->root.u.i.link;
    922      1.1     skrll 	}
    923      1.1     skrll 
    924      1.1     skrll       /* Create got section and local_got_refcounts array if they
    925      1.1     skrll 	 are needed.  */
    926      1.1     skrll       r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info,
    927      1.1     skrll 					ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info),
    928      1.1     skrll 					h == NULL);
    929      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
    930      1.1     skrll 	{
    931      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
    932      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
    933      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
    934      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
    935      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
    936      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
    937      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
    938      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
    939      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
    940      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
    941      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
    942      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
    943      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
    944      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
    945      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
    946      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
    947      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
    948      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
    949      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
    950      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL
    951      1.1     skrll 	      && local_got_refcounts == NULL)
    952      1.1     skrll 	    {
    953  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (!elf_s390_allocate_local_syminfo (abfd, symtab_hdr))
    954      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
    955  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
    956      1.1     skrll 	    }
    957  1.1.1.3  christos 
    958      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
    959      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
    960      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
    961      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
    962      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
    963      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
    964  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
    965      1.1     skrll 	    {
    966      1.1     skrll 	      if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    967      1.1     skrll 		htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    968  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (!_bfd_elf_create_got_section (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    969      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
    970      1.1     skrll 	    }
    971      1.1     skrll 	}
    972      1.1     skrll 
    973  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h != NULL)
    974  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
    975  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
    976  1.1.1.3  christos 	    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
    977  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!s390_elf_create_ifunc_sections (htab->elf.dynobj, info))
    978  1.1.1.3  christos 	    return FALSE;
    979  1.1.1.3  christos 
    980  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Make sure an IFUNC symbol defined in a non-shared object
    981  1.1.1.3  christos 	     always gets a PLT slot.  */
    982  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
    983  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
    984  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The symbol is called by the dynamic loader in order
    985  1.1.1.3  christos 		 to resolve the relocation.  So it is in fact also
    986  1.1.1.3  christos 		 referenced.  */
    987  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->ref_regular = 1;
    988  1.1.1.3  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
    989  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
    990  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
    991  1.1.1.3  christos 
    992      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
    993      1.1     skrll 	{
    994      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
    995      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
    996  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* These relocs do not need a GOT slot.  They just load the
    997  1.1.1.3  christos 	     GOT pointer itself or address something else relative to
    998  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the GOT.  Since the GOT pointer has been set up above we
    999  1.1.1.3  christos 	     are done.  */
   1000      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1001  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   1002  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   1003  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   1004  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL || !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) || !h->def_regular)
   1005  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
   1006  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1007      1.1     skrll 
   1008  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   1009      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   1010  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   1011      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   1012      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   1013      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   1014      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   1015      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   1016      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   1017      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a procedure linkage table entry.  We
   1018      1.1     skrll 	     actually build the entry in adjust_dynamic_symbol,
   1019      1.1     skrll 	     because this might be a case of linking PIC code which is
   1020      1.1     skrll 	     never referenced by a dynamic object, in which case we
   1021      1.1     skrll 	     don't need to generate a procedure linkage table entry
   1022      1.1     skrll 	     after all.  */
   1023      1.1     skrll 
   1024      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is a local symbol, we resolve it directly without
   1025      1.1     skrll 	     creating a procedure linkage table entry.  */
   1026      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1027      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1028      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1029      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1030      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1031      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1032      1.1     skrll 
   1033      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   1034      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   1035      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   1036      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   1037      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   1038      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   1039      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires either a procedure linkage table entry
   1040      1.1     skrll 	     or an entry in the local got. We actually build the entry
   1041      1.1     skrll 	     in adjust_dynamic_symbol because whether this is really a
   1042      1.1     skrll 	     global reference can change and with it the fact if we have
   1043      1.1     skrll 	     to create a plt entry or a local got entry. To be able to
   1044      1.1     skrll 	     make a once global symbol a local one we have to keep track
   1045      1.1     skrll 	     of the number of gotplt references that exist for this
   1046      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1047      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1048      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1049      1.1     skrll 	      ((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->gotplt_refcount++;
   1050      1.1     skrll 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1051      1.1     skrll 	      h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1052      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1053      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1054      1.1     skrll 	    local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1055      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1056      1.1     skrll 
   1057      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   1058      1.1     skrll 	  htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1059      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1060      1.1     skrll 
   1061      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1062      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1063      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1064      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1065      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1066  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1067      1.1     skrll 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1068      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1069      1.1     skrll 
   1070      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   1071      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   1072      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   1073      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   1074      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   1075      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   1076      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1077      1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1078      1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1079      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1080      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1081      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT12:
   1082      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT16:
   1083      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT20:
   1084      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOT32:
   1085      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_GOTENT:
   1086      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1087      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1088      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   1089      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1090      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1091      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   1092      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   1093      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1094      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1095      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   1096      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   1097      1.1     skrll 	    case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   1098      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE_NLT;
   1099      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1100      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1101      1.1     skrll 
   1102      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   1103      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1104      1.1     skrll 	      h->got.refcount += 1;
   1105      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1106      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1107      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1108      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1109      1.1     skrll 	      local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1110      1.1     skrll 	      old_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
   1111      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1112      1.1     skrll 	  /* If a TLS symbol is accessed using IE at least once,
   1113      1.1     skrll 	     there is no point to use dynamic model for it.  */
   1114      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type && old_tls_type != GOT_UNKNOWN)
   1115      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1116      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type == GOT_NORMAL || tls_type == GOT_NORMAL)
   1117      1.1     skrll 		{
   1118  1.1.1.6  christos 		  _bfd_error_handler
   1119  1.1.1.6  christos 		    /* xgettext:c-format */
   1120  1.1.1.7  christos 		    (_("%pB: `%s' accessed both as normal and thread local symbol"),
   1121      1.1     skrll 		     abfd, h->root.root.string);
   1122      1.1     skrll 		  return FALSE;
   1123      1.1     skrll 		}
   1124      1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type > tls_type)
   1125      1.1     skrll 		tls_type = old_tls_type;
   1126      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1127      1.1     skrll 
   1128      1.1     skrll 	  if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
   1129      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1130      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1131      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->tls_type = tls_type;
   1132      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1133      1.1     skrll 		elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
   1134      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1135      1.1     skrll 
   1136      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type != R_390_TLS_IE64)
   1137      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1138      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1139      1.1     skrll 
   1140      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   1141  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* For static linking and executables this reloc will be
   1142  1.1.1.4  christos 	     calculated at linktime otherwise a TLS_TPOFF runtime
   1143  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc will be generated.  */
   1144  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64 && bfd_link_pie (info))
   1145  1.1.1.4  christos 	    break;
   1146  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1147  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   1148      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1149      1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1150      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through */
   1151      1.1     skrll 
   1152      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_8:
   1153      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_16:
   1154      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_32:
   1155      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_64:
   1156  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   1157      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   1158      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   1159  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   1160      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   1161      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   1162      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   1163  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL && bfd_link_executable (info))
   1164      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1165      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is in a read-only section, we might
   1166      1.1     skrll 		 need a copy reloc.  We can't check reliably at this
   1167      1.1     skrll 		 stage whether the section is read-only, as input
   1168      1.1     skrll 		 sections have not yet been mapped to output sections.
   1169      1.1     skrll 		 Tentatively set the flag for now, and correct in
   1170      1.1     skrll 		 adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1171      1.1     skrll 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1172      1.1     skrll 
   1173  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   1174  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   1175  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* We may need a .plt entry if the function this reloc
   1176  1.1.1.3  christos 		     refers to is in a shared lib.  */
   1177  1.1.1.3  christos 		  h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1178  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   1179      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1180      1.1     skrll 
   1181      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1182      1.1     skrll 	     against a global symbol, or a non PC relative reloc
   1183      1.1     skrll 	     against a local symbol, then we need to copy the reloc
   1184      1.1     skrll 	     into the shared library.  However, if we are linking with
   1185      1.1     skrll 	     -Bsymbolic, we do not need to copy a reloc against a
   1186      1.1     skrll 	     global symbol which is defined in an object we are
   1187      1.1     skrll 	     including in the link (i.e., DEF_REGULAR is set).  At
   1188      1.1     skrll 	     this point we have not seen all the input files, so it is
   1189      1.1     skrll 	     possible that DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set
   1190      1.1     skrll 	     later (it is never cleared).  In case of a weak definition,
   1191      1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR may be cleared later by a strong definition in
   1192      1.1     skrll 	     a shared library. We account for that possibility below by
   1193      1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the relocs_copied field of the hash
   1194      1.1     skrll 	     table entry.  A similar situation occurs when creating
   1195      1.1     skrll 	     shared libraries and symbol visibility changes render the
   1196      1.1     skrll 	     symbol local.
   1197      1.1     skrll 
   1198      1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1199      1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1200      1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1201      1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1202  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1203      1.1     skrll 	       && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1204      1.1     skrll 	       && ((ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16
   1205  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC12DBL
   1206      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC16DBL
   1207  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC24DBL
   1208      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32
   1209      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC32DBL
   1210      1.1     skrll 		    && ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) != R_390_PC64)
   1211      1.1     skrll 		   || (h != NULL
   1212  1.1.1.2  christos 		       && (! SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   1213      1.1     skrll 			   || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1214      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))))
   1215      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1216  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1217      1.1     skrll 		  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1218      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   1219      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1220      1.1     skrll 		      || !h->def_regular)))
   1221      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1222  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1223  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **head;
   1224      1.1     skrll 
   1225      1.1     skrll 	      /* We must copy these reloc types into the output file.
   1226      1.1     skrll 		 Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1227      1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1228      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1229      1.1     skrll 		{
   1230      1.1     skrll 		  if (htab->elf.dynobj == NULL)
   1231      1.1     skrll 		    htab->elf.dynobj = abfd;
   1232      1.1     skrll 
   1233  1.1.1.2  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1234  1.1.1.2  christos 		    (sec, htab->elf.dynobj, 3, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1235      1.1     skrll 
   1236  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1237  1.1.1.2  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1238      1.1     skrll 		}
   1239      1.1     skrll 
   1240      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1241      1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1242      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   1243      1.1     skrll 		{
   1244      1.1     skrll 		  head = &((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h)->dyn_relocs;
   1245      1.1     skrll 		}
   1246      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1247      1.1     skrll 		{
   1248      1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1249      1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1250      1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1251      1.1     skrll 		  asection *s;
   1252      1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1253      1.1     skrll 
   1254  1.1.1.2  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1255  1.1.1.2  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1256  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1257      1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1258      1.1     skrll 
   1259  1.1.1.2  christos 		  s = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1260  1.1.1.2  christos 		  if (s == NULL)
   1261  1.1.1.2  christos 		    s = sec;
   1262  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1263      1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel;
   1264  1.1.1.3  christos 		  head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1265      1.1     skrll 		}
   1266      1.1     skrll 
   1267      1.1     skrll 	      p = *head;
   1268      1.1     skrll 	      if (p == NULL || p->sec != sec)
   1269      1.1     skrll 		{
   1270      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_size_type amt = sizeof *p;
   1271  1.1.1.3  christos 		  p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   1272      1.1     skrll 		       bfd_alloc (htab->elf.dynobj, amt));
   1273      1.1     skrll 		  if (p == NULL)
   1274      1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1275      1.1     skrll 		  p->next = *head;
   1276      1.1     skrll 		  *head = p;
   1277      1.1     skrll 		  p->sec = sec;
   1278      1.1     skrll 		  p->count = 0;
   1279      1.1     skrll 		  p->pc_count = 0;
   1280      1.1     skrll 		}
   1281      1.1     skrll 
   1282      1.1     skrll 	      p->count += 1;
   1283      1.1     skrll 	      if (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16
   1284  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC12DBL
   1285  1.1.1.4  christos 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1286      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC16DBL
   1287      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32
   1288      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC32DBL
   1289      1.1     skrll 		  || ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info) == R_390_PC64)
   1290      1.1     skrll 		p->pc_count += 1;
   1291      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1292      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1293      1.1     skrll 
   1294      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1295      1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1296      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1297      1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_offset))
   1298      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1299      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1300      1.1     skrll 
   1301      1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1302      1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1303      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1304      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (h != NULL);
   1305      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL
   1306      1.1     skrll 	      && !bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, h, rel->r_addend))
   1307      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1308      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1309      1.1     skrll 
   1310      1.1     skrll 	default:
   1311      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1312      1.1     skrll 	}
   1313      1.1     skrll     }
   1314      1.1     skrll 
   1315      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1316      1.1     skrll }
   1317      1.1     skrll 
   1318      1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against GC for a given
   1319      1.1     skrll    relocation.  */
   1320      1.1     skrll 
   1321      1.1     skrll static asection *
   1322      1.1     skrll elf_s390_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1323      1.1     skrll 		       struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1324      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Rela *rel,
   1325      1.1     skrll 		       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1326      1.1     skrll 		       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1327      1.1     skrll {
   1328      1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL)
   1329      1.1     skrll     switch (ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   1330      1.1     skrll       {
   1331      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1332      1.1     skrll       case R_390_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1333      1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1334      1.1     skrll       }
   1335      1.1     skrll 
   1336      1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rel, h, sym);
   1337      1.1     skrll }
   1338      1.1     skrll 
   1339      1.1     skrll /* Make sure we emit a GOT entry if the symbol was supposed to have a PLT
   1340      1.1     skrll    entry but we found we will not create any.  Called when we find we will
   1341      1.1     skrll    not have any PLT for this symbol, by for example
   1342      1.1     skrll    elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol when we're doing a proper dynamic link,
   1343      1.1     skrll    or elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections if no dynamic sections will be
   1344      1.1     skrll    created (we're only linking static objects).  */
   1345      1.1     skrll 
   1346      1.1     skrll static void
   1347  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_adjust_gotplt (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *h)
   1348      1.1     skrll {
   1349      1.1     skrll   if (h->elf.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1350      1.1     skrll     h = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h->elf.root.u.i.link;
   1351      1.1     skrll 
   1352      1.1     skrll   if (h->gotplt_refcount <= 0)
   1353      1.1     skrll     return;
   1354      1.1     skrll 
   1355      1.1     skrll   /* We simply add the number of gotplt references to the number
   1356      1.1     skrll    * of got references for this symbol.  */
   1357      1.1     skrll   h->elf.got.refcount += h->gotplt_refcount;
   1358      1.1     skrll   h->gotplt_refcount = -1;
   1359      1.1     skrll }
   1360      1.1     skrll 
   1361  1.1.1.6  christos /* Find dynamic relocs for H that apply to read-only sections.  */
   1362  1.1.1.6  christos 
   1363  1.1.1.6  christos static asection *
   1364  1.1.1.6  christos readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h)
   1365  1.1.1.6  christos {
   1366  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1367  1.1.1.6  christos 
   1368  1.1.1.6  christos   for (p = elf_s390_hash_entry (h)->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1369  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1370  1.1.1.6  christos       asection *s = p->sec->output_section;
   1371  1.1.1.6  christos 
   1372  1.1.1.6  christos       if (s != NULL && (s->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1373  1.1.1.6  christos 	return p->sec;
   1374  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   1375  1.1.1.6  christos   return NULL;
   1376  1.1.1.6  christos }
   1377  1.1.1.6  christos 
   1378      1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1379      1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1380      1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1381      1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1382      1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1383      1.1     skrll 
   1384      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1385  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1386  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h)
   1387      1.1     skrll {
   1388      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1389  1.1.1.6  christos   asection *s, *srel;
   1390      1.1     skrll 
   1391  1.1.1.3  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT. */
   1392  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   1393  1.1.1.4  christos     {
   1394  1.1.1.4  christos       /* All local STT_GNU_IFUNC references must be treated as local
   1395  1.1.1.4  christos 	 calls via local PLT.  */
   1396  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->ref_regular && SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1397  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1398  1.1.1.4  christos 	  bfd_size_type pc_count = 0, count = 0;
   1399  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1400  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh;
   1401  1.1.1.4  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1402  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1403  1.1.1.4  christos 	  eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h;
   1404  1.1.1.4  christos 	  for (pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1405  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1406  1.1.1.4  christos 	      pc_count += p->pc_count;
   1407  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1408  1.1.1.4  christos 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1409  1.1.1.4  christos 	      count += p->count;
   1410  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1411  1.1.1.4  christos 		*pp = p->next;
   1412  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1413  1.1.1.4  christos 		pp = &p->next;
   1414  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1415  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1416  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (pc_count || count)
   1417  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   1418  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->needs_plt = 1;
   1419  1.1.1.4  christos 	      h->non_got_ref = 1;
   1420  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1421  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount = 1;
   1422  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else
   1423  1.1.1.4  christos 		h->plt.refcount += 1;
   1424  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   1425  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1426  1.1.1.4  christos 
   1427  1.1.1.4  christos       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0)
   1428  1.1.1.4  christos 	{
   1429  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1430  1.1.1.4  christos 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1431  1.1.1.4  christos 	}
   1432  1.1.1.4  christos       return TRUE;
   1433  1.1.1.4  christos     }
   1434  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1435      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1436      1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later
   1437      1.1     skrll      (although we could actually do it here).  */
   1438      1.1     skrll   if (h->type == STT_FUNC
   1439      1.1     skrll       || h->needs_plt)
   1440      1.1     skrll     {
   1441      1.1     skrll       if (h->plt.refcount <= 0
   1442  1.1.1.2  christos 	  || SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)
   1443  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   1444      1.1     skrll 	{
   1445      1.1     skrll 	  /* This case can occur if we saw a PLT32 reloc in an input
   1446      1.1     skrll 	     file, but the symbol was never referred to by a dynamic
   1447      1.1     skrll 	     object, or if all references were garbage collected.  In
   1448      1.1     skrll 	     such a case, we don't actually need to build a procedure
   1449      1.1     skrll 	     linkage table, and we can just do a PC32 reloc instead.  */
   1450      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1451      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1452      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1453      1.1     skrll 	}
   1454      1.1     skrll 
   1455      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1456      1.1     skrll     }
   1457      1.1     skrll   else
   1458      1.1     skrll     /* It's possible that we incorrectly decided a .plt reloc was
   1459      1.1     skrll        needed for an R_390_PC32 reloc to a non-function sym in
   1460      1.1     skrll        check_relocs.  We can't decide accurately between function and
   1461      1.1     skrll        non-function syms in check-relocs;  Objects loaded later in
   1462      1.1     skrll        the link may change h->type.  So fix it now.  */
   1463      1.1     skrll     h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1464      1.1     skrll 
   1465      1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1466      1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1467      1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1468  1.1.1.6  christos   if (h->is_weakalias)
   1469      1.1     skrll     {
   1470  1.1.1.6  christos       struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (h);
   1471  1.1.1.6  christos       BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
   1472  1.1.1.6  christos       h->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
   1473  1.1.1.6  christos       h->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
   1474      1.1     skrll       if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS || info->nocopyreloc)
   1475  1.1.1.6  christos 	h->non_got_ref = def->non_got_ref;
   1476      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1477      1.1     skrll     }
   1478      1.1     skrll 
   1479      1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1480      1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1481      1.1     skrll 
   1482      1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1483      1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1484      1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1485      1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1486  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1487      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1488      1.1     skrll 
   1489      1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1490      1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1491      1.1     skrll   if (!h->non_got_ref)
   1492      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1493      1.1     skrll 
   1494      1.1     skrll   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1495      1.1     skrll   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1496      1.1     skrll     {
   1497      1.1     skrll       h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1498      1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1499      1.1     skrll     }
   1500      1.1     skrll 
   1501  1.1.1.6  christos   /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1502  1.1.1.6  christos      we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1503  1.1.1.6  christos   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS && !readonly_dynrelocs (h))
   1504      1.1     skrll     {
   1505  1.1.1.6  christos       h->non_got_ref = 0;
   1506  1.1.1.6  christos       return TRUE;
   1507      1.1     skrll     }
   1508      1.1     skrll 
   1509      1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1510      1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1511      1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1512      1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1513      1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1514      1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1515      1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1516      1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1517      1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1518      1.1     skrll 
   1519      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1520  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1521  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1522      1.1     skrll 
   1523      1.1     skrll   /* We must generate a R_390_COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1524      1.1     skrll      copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1525      1.1     skrll      runtime process image.  */
   1526  1.1.1.6  christos   if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1527  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1528  1.1.1.6  christos       s = htab->elf.sdynrelro;
   1529  1.1.1.6  christos       srel = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
   1530  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   1531  1.1.1.6  christos   else
   1532  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1533  1.1.1.6  christos       s = htab->elf.sdynbss;
   1534  1.1.1.6  christos       srel = htab->elf.srelbss;
   1535  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   1536  1.1.1.3  christos   if ((h->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && h->size != 0)
   1537      1.1     skrll     {
   1538  1.1.1.6  christos       srel->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1539      1.1     skrll       h->needs_copy = 1;
   1540      1.1     skrll     }
   1541      1.1     skrll 
   1542  1.1.1.4  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, h, s);
   1543      1.1     skrll }
   1544      1.1     skrll 
   1545      1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1546      1.1     skrll    dynamic relocs.  */
   1547      1.1     skrll 
   1548      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1549  1.1.1.2  christos allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   1550  1.1.1.2  christos 		    void * inf)
   1551      1.1     skrll {
   1552      1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1553      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1554  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *)h;
   1555  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1556      1.1     skrll 
   1557      1.1     skrll   if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1558      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1559      1.1     skrll 
   1560      1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1561      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1562  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1563  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1564      1.1     skrll 
   1565  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Since STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT, we handle it
   1566  1.1.1.3  christos      here if it is defined and referenced in a non-shared object.  */
   1567  1.1.1.3  christos   if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   1568  1.1.1.4  christos     return s390_elf_allocate_ifunc_dyn_relocs (info, h);
   1569  1.1.1.3  christos   else if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1570  1.1.1.3  christos 	   && h->plt.refcount > 0)
   1571      1.1     skrll     {
   1572      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1573      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1574      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1575      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1576      1.1     skrll 	{
   1577      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1578      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1579      1.1     skrll 	}
   1580      1.1     skrll 
   1581  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1582      1.1     skrll 	  || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, 0, h))
   1583      1.1     skrll 	{
   1584  1.1.1.3  christos 	  asection *s = htab->elf.splt;
   1585      1.1     skrll 
   1586      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first .plt entry, make room for the special
   1587      1.1     skrll 	     first entry.  */
   1588      1.1     skrll 	  if (s->size == 0)
   1589      1.1     skrll 	    s->size += PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1590      1.1     skrll 
   1591      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = s->size;
   1592      1.1     skrll 
   1593      1.1     skrll 	  /* If this symbol is not defined in a regular file, and we are
   1594      1.1     skrll 	     not generating a shared library, then set the symbol to this
   1595      1.1     skrll 	     location in the .plt.  This is required to make function
   1596      1.1     skrll 	     pointers compare as equal between the normal executable and
   1597      1.1     skrll 	     the shared library.  */
   1598  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_pic (info)
   1599      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->def_regular)
   1600      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1601      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.section = s;
   1602      1.1     skrll 	      h->root.u.def.value = h->plt.offset;
   1603      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1604      1.1     skrll 
   1605      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make room for this entry.  */
   1606      1.1     skrll 	  s->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1607      1.1     skrll 
   1608      1.1     skrll 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .got.plt section, which
   1609      1.1     skrll 	     will be placed in the .got section by the linker script.  */
   1610  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1611      1.1     skrll 
   1612      1.1     skrll 	  /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1613  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1614      1.1     skrll 	}
   1615      1.1     skrll       else
   1616      1.1     skrll 	{
   1617      1.1     skrll 	  h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1618      1.1     skrll 	  h->needs_plt = 0;
   1619      1.1     skrll 	  elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1620      1.1     skrll 	}
   1621      1.1     skrll     }
   1622      1.1     skrll   else
   1623      1.1     skrll     {
   1624      1.1     skrll       h->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1625      1.1     skrll       h->needs_plt = 0;
   1626      1.1     skrll       elf_s390_adjust_gotplt((struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *) h);
   1627      1.1     skrll     }
   1628      1.1     skrll 
   1629      1.1     skrll   /* If R_390_TLS_{IE64,GOTIE64,GOTIE12,IEENT} symbol is now local to
   1630      1.1     skrll      the binary, we can optimize a bit. IE64 and GOTIE64 get converted
   1631      1.1     skrll      to R_390_TLS_LE64 requiring no TLS entry. For GOTIE12 and IEENT
   1632      1.1     skrll      we can save the dynamic TLS relocation.  */
   1633      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.refcount > 0
   1634  1.1.1.4  christos       && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1635      1.1     skrll       && h->dynindx == -1
   1636      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1637      1.1     skrll     {
   1638      1.1     skrll       if (elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type == GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   1639      1.1     skrll 	/* For the GOTIE access without a literal pool entry the offset has
   1640      1.1     skrll 	   to be stored somewhere. The immediate value in the instruction
   1641      1.1     skrll 	   is not bit enough so the value is stored in the got.  */
   1642      1.1     skrll 	{
   1643  1.1.1.3  christos 	  h->got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   1644  1.1.1.3  christos 	  htab->elf.sgot->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1645      1.1     skrll 	}
   1646      1.1     skrll       else
   1647      1.1     skrll 	h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1648      1.1     skrll     }
   1649      1.1     skrll   else if (h->got.refcount > 0)
   1650      1.1     skrll     {
   1651      1.1     skrll       asection *s;
   1652      1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean dyn;
   1653      1.1     skrll       int tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   1654      1.1     skrll 
   1655      1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1656      1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1657      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   1658      1.1     skrll 	  && !h->forced_local)
   1659      1.1     skrll 	{
   1660      1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1661      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1662      1.1     skrll 	}
   1663      1.1     skrll 
   1664  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   1665      1.1     skrll       h->got.offset = s->size;
   1666      1.1     skrll       s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1667      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_GD64 needs 2 consecutive GOT slots.  */
   1668      1.1     skrll       if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1669      1.1     skrll 	s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1670      1.1     skrll       dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   1671      1.1     skrll       /* R_390_TLS_IE64 needs one dynamic relocation,
   1672      1.1     skrll 	 R_390_TLS_GD64 needs one if local symbol and two if global.  */
   1673      1.1     skrll       if ((tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD && h->dynindx == -1)
   1674      1.1     skrll 	  || tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   1675  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1676      1.1     skrll       else if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1677  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1678  1.1.1.6  christos       else if (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h)
   1679  1.1.1.4  christos 	       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   1680      1.1     skrll 		   || WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, 0, h)))
   1681  1.1.1.3  christos 	htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1682      1.1     skrll     }
   1683      1.1     skrll   else
   1684      1.1     skrll     h->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1685      1.1     skrll 
   1686      1.1     skrll   if (eh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1687      1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1688      1.1     skrll 
   1689      1.1     skrll   /* In the shared -Bsymbolic case, discard space allocated for
   1690      1.1     skrll      dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols which turn out to be
   1691      1.1     skrll      defined in regular objects.  For the normal shared case, discard
   1692      1.1     skrll      space for pc-relative relocs that have become local due to symbol
   1693      1.1     skrll      visibility changes.  */
   1694      1.1     skrll 
   1695  1.1.1.4  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1696      1.1     skrll     {
   1697  1.1.1.2  christos       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h))
   1698      1.1     skrll 	{
   1699  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **pp;
   1700      1.1     skrll 
   1701      1.1     skrll 	  for (pp = &eh->dyn_relocs; (p = *pp) != NULL; )
   1702      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1703      1.1     skrll 	      p->count -= p->pc_count;
   1704      1.1     skrll 	      p->pc_count = 0;
   1705      1.1     skrll 	      if (p->count == 0)
   1706      1.1     skrll 		*pp = p->next;
   1707      1.1     skrll 	      else
   1708      1.1     skrll 		pp = &p->next;
   1709      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1710      1.1     skrll 	}
   1711      1.1     skrll 
   1712      1.1     skrll       /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
   1713      1.1     skrll 	 visibility.  */
   1714      1.1     skrll       if (eh->dyn_relocs != NULL
   1715      1.1     skrll 	  && h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   1716      1.1     skrll 	{
   1717  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT
   1718  1.1.1.6  christos 	      || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   1719      1.1     skrll 	    eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1720      1.1     skrll 
   1721      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
   1722      1.1     skrll 	     symbol in PIEs.  */
   1723      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h->dynindx == -1
   1724      1.1     skrll 		   && !h->forced_local)
   1725      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1726      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1727      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1728      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1729      1.1     skrll 	}
   1730      1.1     skrll     }
   1731      1.1     skrll   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1732      1.1     skrll     {
   1733      1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   1734      1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   1735      1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   1736      1.1     skrll 
   1737      1.1     skrll       if (!h->non_got_ref
   1738      1.1     skrll 	  && ((h->def_dynamic
   1739      1.1     skrll 	       && !h->def_regular)
   1740      1.1     skrll 	      || (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created
   1741      1.1     skrll 		  && (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1742      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
   1743      1.1     skrll 	{
   1744      1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1745      1.1     skrll 	     Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1746      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   1747      1.1     skrll 	      && !h->forced_local)
   1748      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1749      1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, h))
   1750      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1751      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1752      1.1     skrll 
   1753      1.1     skrll 	  /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
   1754      1.1     skrll 	     relocs.  */
   1755      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->dynindx != -1)
   1756      1.1     skrll 	    goto keep;
   1757      1.1     skrll 	}
   1758      1.1     skrll 
   1759      1.1     skrll       eh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1760      1.1     skrll 
   1761      1.1     skrll     keep: ;
   1762      1.1     skrll     }
   1763      1.1     skrll 
   1764      1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   1765      1.1     skrll   for (p = eh->dyn_relocs; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1766      1.1     skrll     {
   1767      1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   1768      1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1769      1.1     skrll     }
   1770      1.1     skrll 
   1771      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1772      1.1     skrll }
   1773      1.1     skrll 
   1774  1.1.1.6  christos /* Set DF_TEXTREL if we find any dynamic relocs that apply to
   1775  1.1.1.6  christos    read-only sections.  */
   1776      1.1     skrll 
   1777      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1778  1.1.1.6  christos maybe_set_textrel (struct elf_link_hash_entry *h, void *info_p)
   1779      1.1     skrll {
   1780  1.1.1.6  christos   asection *sec;
   1781      1.1     skrll 
   1782  1.1.1.6  christos   if (h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1783  1.1.1.6  christos     return TRUE;
   1784      1.1     skrll 
   1785  1.1.1.6  christos   sec = readonly_dynrelocs (h);
   1786  1.1.1.6  christos   if (sec != NULL)
   1787  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   1788  1.1.1.6  christos       struct bfd_link_info *info = (struct bfd_link_info *) info_p;
   1789      1.1     skrll 
   1790  1.1.1.6  christos       info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   1791  1.1.1.6  christos       info->callbacks->minfo
   1792  1.1.1.7  christos 	(_("%pB: dynamic relocation against `%pT' in read-only section `%pA'\n"),
   1793  1.1.1.6  christos 	 sec->owner, h->root.root.string, sec);
   1794      1.1     skrll 
   1795  1.1.1.6  christos       /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   1796  1.1.1.6  christos       return FALSE;
   1797      1.1     skrll     }
   1798      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1799      1.1     skrll }
   1800      1.1     skrll 
   1801      1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   1802      1.1     skrll 
   1803      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1804  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1805  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info)
   1806      1.1     skrll {
   1807      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   1808      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   1809      1.1     skrll   asection *s;
   1810      1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   1811      1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   1812      1.1     skrll 
   1813      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   1814  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1815  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   1816  1.1.1.2  christos 
   1817      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   1818      1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   1819      1.1     skrll     abort ();
   1820      1.1     skrll 
   1821      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   1822      1.1     skrll     {
   1823      1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   1824  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   1825      1.1     skrll 	{
   1826  1.1.1.3  christos 	  s = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   1827      1.1     skrll 	  if (s == NULL)
   1828      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1829      1.1     skrll 	  s->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   1830      1.1     skrll 	  s->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   1831      1.1     skrll 	}
   1832      1.1     skrll     }
   1833      1.1     skrll 
   1834      1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got offsets for local syms, and space for local dynamic
   1835      1.1     skrll      relocs.  */
   1836  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   1837      1.1     skrll     {
   1838      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   1839      1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   1840      1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   1841      1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   1842      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1843      1.1     skrll       asection *srela;
   1844  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   1845  1.1.1.3  christos       unsigned int i;
   1846      1.1     skrll 
   1847      1.1     skrll       if (! is_s390_elf (ibfd))
   1848      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1849      1.1     skrll 
   1850      1.1     skrll       for (s = ibfd->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   1851      1.1     skrll 	{
   1852  1.1.1.3  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *p;
   1853      1.1     skrll 
   1854      1.1     skrll 	  for (p = elf_section_data (s)->local_dynrel; p != NULL; p = p->next)
   1855      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1856      1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec)
   1857      1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (p->sec->output_section))
   1858      1.1     skrll 		{
   1859      1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   1860      1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   1861      1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   1862      1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   1863      1.1     skrll 		}
   1864      1.1     skrll 	      else if (p->count != 0)
   1865      1.1     skrll 		{
   1866      1.1     skrll 		  srela = elf_section_data (p->sec)->sreloc;
   1867      1.1     skrll 		  srela->size += p->count * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1868      1.1     skrll 		  if ((p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1869      1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   1870      1.1     skrll 		}
   1871      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1872      1.1     skrll 	}
   1873      1.1     skrll 
   1874      1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   1875      1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   1876      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1877      1.1     skrll 
   1878      1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   1879      1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1880      1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   1881      1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   1882  1.1.1.3  christos       s = htab->elf.sgot;
   1883  1.1.1.3  christos       srela = htab->elf.srelgot;
   1884      1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got, ++local_tls_type)
   1885      1.1     skrll 	{
   1886      1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   1887      1.1     skrll 	    {
   1888      1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = s->size;
   1889      1.1     skrll 	      s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1890      1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   1891      1.1     skrll 		s->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1892  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1893      1.1     skrll 		srela->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1894      1.1     skrll 	    }
   1895      1.1     skrll 	  else
   1896      1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1897      1.1     skrll 	}
   1898  1.1.1.3  christos 
   1899  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   1900  1.1.1.3  christos       for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   1901  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   1902  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (local_plt[i].plt.refcount > 0)
   1903  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   1904  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[i].plt.offset = htab->elf.iplt->size;
   1905  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.iplt->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1906  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.igotplt->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1907  1.1.1.3  christos 	      htab->elf.irelplt->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1908  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   1909  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   1910  1.1.1.3  christos 	    local_plt[i].plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1911  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   1912      1.1     skrll     }
   1913      1.1     skrll 
   1914      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   1915      1.1     skrll     {
   1916      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for R_390_TLS_LDM64
   1917      1.1     skrll 	 relocs.  */
   1918  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->elf.sgot->size;
   1919  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.sgot->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1920  1.1.1.3  christos       htab->elf.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   1921      1.1     skrll     }
   1922      1.1     skrll   else
   1923      1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   1924      1.1     skrll 
   1925      1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   1926      1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   1927  1.1.1.3  christos   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   1928      1.1     skrll 
   1929      1.1     skrll   /* We now have determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.
   1930      1.1     skrll      Allocate memory for them.  */
   1931      1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   1932      1.1     skrll   for (s = dynobj->sections; s != NULL; s = s->next)
   1933      1.1     skrll     {
   1934      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   1935      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1936      1.1     skrll 
   1937  1.1.1.3  christos       if (s == htab->elf.splt
   1938  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgot
   1939  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sgotplt
   1940  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sdynbss
   1941  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.sdynrelro
   1942  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.iplt
   1943  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->elf.igotplt
   1944  1.1.1.3  christos 	  || s == htab->irelifunc)
   1945      1.1     skrll 	{
   1946      1.1     skrll 	  /* Strip this section if we don't need it; see the
   1947      1.1     skrll 	     comment below.  */
   1948      1.1     skrll 	}
   1949      1.1     skrll       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_get_section_name (dynobj, s), ".rela"))
   1950      1.1     skrll 	{
   1951  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s->size != 0 && s != htab->elf.srelplt)
   1952      1.1     skrll 	    relocs = TRUE;
   1953      1.1     skrll 
   1954      1.1     skrll 	  /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   1955      1.1     skrll 	     to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   1956      1.1     skrll 	  s->reloc_count = 0;
   1957      1.1     skrll 	}
   1958      1.1     skrll       else
   1959      1.1     skrll 	{
   1960      1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   1961      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1962      1.1     skrll 	}
   1963      1.1     skrll 
   1964      1.1     skrll       if (s->size == 0)
   1965      1.1     skrll 	{
   1966      1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   1967      1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is to handle .rela.bss and
   1968      1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create it in
   1969      1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because it must be created
   1970      1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   1971      1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   1972      1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   1973      1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   1974      1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   1975      1.1     skrll 
   1976      1.1     skrll 	  s->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   1977      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1978      1.1     skrll 	}
   1979      1.1     skrll 
   1980      1.1     skrll       if ((s->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   1981      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   1982      1.1     skrll 
   1983      1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  We use bfd_zalloc
   1984      1.1     skrll 	 here in case unused entries are not reclaimed before the
   1985      1.1     skrll 	 section's contents are written out.  This should not happen,
   1986      1.1     skrll 	 but this way if it does, we get a R_390_NONE reloc instead
   1987      1.1     skrll 	 of garbage.  */
   1988      1.1     skrll       s->contents = (bfd_byte *) bfd_zalloc (dynobj, s->size);
   1989      1.1     skrll       if (s->contents == NULL)
   1990      1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1991      1.1     skrll     }
   1992      1.1     skrll 
   1993      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   1994      1.1     skrll     {
   1995      1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   1996      1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   1997      1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   1998      1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   1999      1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2000      1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2001      1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2002      1.1     skrll 
   2003  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info))
   2004      1.1     skrll 	{
   2005      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2006      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2007      1.1     skrll 	}
   2008      1.1     skrll 
   2009  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.splt->size != 0)
   2010      1.1     skrll 	{
   2011      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0)
   2012      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2013      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2014      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2015      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2016      1.1     skrll 	}
   2017      1.1     skrll 
   2018      1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2019      1.1     skrll 	{
   2020      1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2021      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2022      1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela)))
   2023      1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2024      1.1     skrll 
   2025      1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2026      1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2027      1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2028  1.1.1.6  christos 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->elf, maybe_set_textrel, info);
   2029      1.1     skrll 
   2030      1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2031      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2032      1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2033      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2034      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2035      1.1     skrll 	}
   2036      1.1     skrll     }
   2037      1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2038      1.1     skrll 
   2039      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2040      1.1     skrll }
   2041      1.1     skrll 
   2042      1.1     skrll /* Return the base VMA address which should be subtracted from real addresses
   2043      1.1     skrll    when resolving @dtpoff relocation.
   2044      1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   2045      1.1     skrll 
   2046      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   2047  1.1.1.3  christos dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2048      1.1     skrll {
   2049      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   2050      1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   2051      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   2052      1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   2053      1.1     skrll }
   2054      1.1     skrll 
   2055      1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for @tpoff relocation
   2056      1.1     skrll    if STT_TLS virtual address is ADDRESS.  */
   2057      1.1     skrll 
   2058      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   2059  1.1.1.3  christos tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   2060      1.1     skrll {
   2061      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   2062      1.1     skrll 
   2063      1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   2064      1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   2065      1.1     skrll     return 0;
   2066      1.1     skrll   return htab->tls_size + htab->tls_sec->vma - address;
   2067      1.1     skrll }
   2068      1.1     skrll 
   2069      1.1     skrll /* Complain if TLS instruction relocation is against an invalid
   2070      1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2071      1.1     skrll 
   2072      1.1     skrll static void
   2073  1.1.1.3  christos invalid_tls_insn (bfd *input_bfd,
   2074  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *input_section,
   2075  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela *rel)
   2076      1.1     skrll {
   2077      1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto;
   2078      1.1     skrll 
   2079      1.1     skrll   howto = elf_howto_table + ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   2080  1.1.1.6  christos   _bfd_error_handler
   2081  1.1.1.6  christos     /* xgettext:c-format */
   2082  1.1.1.7  christos     (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): invalid instruction for TLS relocation %s"),
   2083      1.1     skrll      input_bfd,
   2084      1.1     skrll      input_section,
   2085  1.1.1.7  christos      (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
   2086      1.1     skrll      howto->name);
   2087      1.1     skrll   bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2088      1.1     skrll }
   2089      1.1     skrll 
   2090      1.1     skrll /* Relocate a 390 ELF section.  */
   2091      1.1     skrll 
   2092      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2093  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   2094  1.1.1.2  christos 			   struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2095  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd *input_bfd,
   2096  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection *input_section,
   2097  1.1.1.2  christos 			   bfd_byte *contents,
   2098  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   2099  1.1.1.2  christos 			   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   2100  1.1.1.2  christos 			   asection **local_sections)
   2101      1.1     skrll {
   2102      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   2103      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2104      1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes;
   2105      1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   2106      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rel;
   2107      1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   2108      1.1     skrll 
   2109      1.1     skrll   BFD_ASSERT (is_s390_elf (input_bfd));
   2110      1.1     skrll 
   2111      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   2112  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2113  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   2114  1.1.1.2  christos 
   2115      1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (input_bfd);
   2116      1.1     skrll   sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2117      1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   2118      1.1     skrll 
   2119      1.1     skrll   rel = relocs;
   2120      1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   2121      1.1     skrll   for (; rel < relend; rel++)
   2122      1.1     skrll     {
   2123      1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   2124      1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   2125      1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   2126      1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *h;
   2127      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2128      1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   2129      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma off;
   2130      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   2131      1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc;
   2132      1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type r;
   2133      1.1     skrll       int tls_type;
   2134  1.1.1.3  christos       asection *base_got = htab->elf.sgot;
   2135  1.1.1.6  christos       bfd_boolean resolved_to_zero;
   2136      1.1     skrll 
   2137      1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info);
   2138      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTINHERIT
   2139      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (int) R_390_GNU_VTENTRY)
   2140      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2141      1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (int) R_390_max)
   2142      1.1     skrll 	{
   2143      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2144      1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   2145      1.1     skrll 	}
   2146      1.1     skrll 
   2147      1.1     skrll       howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2148      1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rel->r_info);
   2149      1.1     skrll 
   2150      1.1     skrll       h = NULL;
   2151      1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   2152      1.1     skrll       sec = NULL;
   2153      1.1     skrll       unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2154      1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2155      1.1     skrll 	{
   2156      1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   2157      1.1     skrll 	  sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   2158  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2159  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   2160  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2161  1.1.1.3  christos 	      struct plt_entry *local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (input_bfd);
   2162  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (local_plt == NULL)
   2163  1.1.1.3  christos 		return FALSE;
   2164  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2165  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Address of the PLT slot.  */
   2166  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2167  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2168  1.1.1.3  christos 			    + local_plt[r_symndx].plt.offset);
   2169  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2170  1.1.1.3  christos 	      switch (r_type)
   2171  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2172  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2173  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2174  1.1.1.4  christos 		case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2175  1.1.1.4  christos 		  relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2176  1.1.1.4  christos 		  break;
   2177  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2178  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2179  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2180  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2181  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2182  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2183  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT12:
   2184  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT16:
   2185  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT20:
   2186  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT32:
   2187  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOT64:
   2188  1.1.1.3  christos 		case R_390_GOTENT:
   2189  1.1.1.3  christos 		  {
   2190  1.1.1.3  christos 		    /* Write the PLT slot address into the GOT slot.  */
   2191  1.1.1.3  christos 		    bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2192  1.1.1.3  christos 				htab->elf.sgot->contents +
   2193  1.1.1.3  christos 				local_got_offsets[r_symndx]);
   2194  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation = (local_got_offsets[r_symndx] +
   2195  1.1.1.3  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->output_offset);
   2196  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2197  1.1.1.3  christos 		    if (r_type == R_390_GOTENT || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2198  1.1.1.3  christos 		      relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2199  1.1.1.3  christos 		    break;
   2200  1.1.1.3  christos 		  }
   2201  1.1.1.3  christos 		default:
   2202  1.1.1.3  christos 		  break;
   2203  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2204  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* The output section is needed later in
   2205  1.1.1.3  christos 		 finish_dynamic_section when creating the dynamic
   2206  1.1.1.3  christos 		 relocation.  */
   2207  1.1.1.3  christos 	      local_plt[r_symndx].sec = sec;
   2208  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2209  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2210  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2211  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sec, rel);
   2212      1.1     skrll 	}
   2213      1.1     skrll       else
   2214      1.1     skrll 	{
   2215      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean warned ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2216  1.1.1.4  christos 	  bfd_boolean ignored ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
   2217      1.1     skrll 
   2218      1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rel,
   2219      1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   2220      1.1     skrll 				   h, sec, relocation,
   2221  1.1.1.4  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned, ignored);
   2222      1.1     skrll 	}
   2223      1.1     skrll 
   2224  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sec != NULL && discarded_section (sec))
   2225  1.1.1.2  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   2226  1.1.1.3  christos 					 rel, 1, relend, howto, 0, contents);
   2227      1.1     skrll 
   2228  1.1.1.4  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   2229      1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2230      1.1     skrll 
   2231  1.1.1.6  christos       resolved_to_zero = (h != NULL
   2232  1.1.1.6  christos 			  && UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h));
   2233  1.1.1.6  christos 
   2234      1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   2235      1.1     skrll 	{
   2236      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT12:
   2237      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT16:
   2238      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT20:
   2239      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT32:
   2240      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLT64:
   2241      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPLTENT:
   2242      1.1     skrll 	  /* There are three cases for a GOTPLT relocation. 1) The
   2243      1.1     skrll 	     relocation is against the jump slot entry of a plt that
   2244      1.1     skrll 	     will get emitted to the output file. 2) The relocation
   2245      1.1     skrll 	     is against the jump slot of a plt entry that has been
   2246      1.1     skrll 	     removed. elf_s390_adjust_gotplt has created a GOT entry
   2247      1.1     skrll 	     as replacement. 3) The relocation is against a local symbol.
   2248      1.1     skrll 	     Cases 2) and 3) are the same as the GOT relocation code
   2249      1.1     skrll 	     so we just have to test for case 1 and fall through for
   2250      1.1     skrll 	     the other two.  */
   2251      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL && h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   2252      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2253      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma plt_index;
   2254      1.1     skrll 
   2255  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2256  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2257  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_index = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2258  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE +
   2259  1.1.1.3  christos 				htab->elf.igotplt->output_offset);
   2260  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2261  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation += htab->elf.igotplt->output_section->vma;
   2262  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2263  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2264  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2265  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Calc. index no.
   2266  1.1.1.3  christos 		     Current offset - size first entry / entry size.  */
   2267  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) /
   2268  1.1.1.3  christos 		    PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2269  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2270  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Offset in GOT is PLT index plus GOT headers(3)
   2271  1.1.1.5  christos 		     times 8, addr & GOT addr.  */
   2272  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (plt_index + 3) * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2273  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2274  1.1.1.3  christos 		    relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2275  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2276      1.1     skrll 	      unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2277      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2278      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2279      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2280      1.1     skrll 
   2281      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT12:
   2282      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT16:
   2283      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT20:
   2284      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT32:
   2285      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOT64:
   2286      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTENT:
   2287      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the global
   2288      1.1     skrll 	     offset table.  */
   2289  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (base_got == NULL)
   2290      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2291      1.1     skrll 
   2292      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   2293      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2294      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean dyn;
   2295      1.1     skrll 
   2296      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   2297      1.1     skrll 	      dyn = htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created;
   2298  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2299  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2300  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2301  1.1.1.3  christos 		  BFD_ASSERT (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1);
   2302  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (off == (bfd_vma)-1)
   2303  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2304  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* No explicit GOT usage so redirect to the
   2305  1.1.1.3  christos 			 got.iplt slot.  */
   2306  1.1.1.3  christos 		      base_got = htab->elf.igotplt;
   2307  1.1.1.3  christos 		      off = h->plt.offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2308  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2309  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2310  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2311  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* Explicit GOT slots must contain the address
   2312  1.1.1.3  christos 			 of the PLT slot. This will be handled in
   2313  1.1.1.3  christos 			 finish_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2314  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2315  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2316  1.1.1.4  christos 	      else if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   2317  1.1.1.4  christos 							  bfd_link_pic (info),
   2318  1.1.1.4  christos 							  h)
   2319  1.1.1.4  christos 		       || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2320  1.1.1.3  christos 			   && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2321  1.1.1.6  christos 		       || resolved_to_zero)
   2322      1.1     skrll 		{
   2323      1.1     skrll 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   2324      1.1     skrll 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   2325      1.1     skrll 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   2326      1.1     skrll 		     because of a version file.  We must initialize
   2327      1.1     skrll 		     this entry in the global offset table.  Since the
   2328      1.1     skrll 		     offset must always be a multiple of 2, we use the
   2329      1.1     skrll 		     least significant bit to record whether we have
   2330      1.1     skrll 		     initialized it already.
   2331      1.1     skrll 
   2332      1.1     skrll 		     When doing a dynamic link, we create a .rel.got
   2333      1.1     skrll 		     relocation entry to initialize the value.  This
   2334      1.1     skrll 		     is done in the finish_dynamic_symbol routine.  */
   2335      1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2336      1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   2337      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2338      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2339      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2340  1.1.1.3  christos 				  base_got->contents + off);
   2341      1.1     skrll 		      h->got.offset |= 1;
   2342      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2343  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2344  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if ((h->def_regular
   2345  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && bfd_link_pic (info)
   2346  1.1.1.4  christos 		       && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   2347  1.1.1.4  christos 		      /* lgrl rx,sym@GOTENT -> larl rx, sym */
   2348  1.1.1.4  christos 		      && ((r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2349  1.1.1.4  christos 			   && (bfd_get_16 (input_bfd,
   2350  1.1.1.4  christos 					   contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2351  1.1.1.4  christos 			       & 0xff0f) == 0xc408)
   2352  1.1.1.4  christos 			  /* lg rx, sym@GOT(r12) -> larl rx, sym */
   2353  1.1.1.4  christos 			  || (r_type == R_390_GOT20
   2354  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && (bfd_get_32 (input_bfd,
   2355  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 2)
   2356  1.1.1.4  christos 				  & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000
   2357  1.1.1.4  christos 			      && bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2358  1.1.1.4  christos 					    contents + rel->r_offset + 3) == 0x04)))
   2359  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2360  1.1.1.4  christos 		    {
   2361  1.1.1.4  christos 		      unsigned short new_insn =
   2362  1.1.1.4  christos 			(0xc000 | (bfd_get_8 (input_bfd,
   2363  1.1.1.4  christos 					      contents + rel->r_offset - 1) & 0xf0));
   2364  1.1.1.4  christos 		      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, new_insn,
   2365  1.1.1.4  christos 				  contents + rel->r_offset - 2);
   2366  1.1.1.4  christos 		      r_type = R_390_PC32DBL;
   2367  1.1.1.4  christos 		      rel->r_addend = 2;
   2368  1.1.1.4  christos 		      howto = elf_howto_table + r_type;
   2369  1.1.1.4  christos 		      relocation = h->root.u.def.value
   2370  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2371  1.1.1.4  christos 			+ h->root.u.def.section->output_offset;
   2372  1.1.1.4  christos 		      goto do_relocation;
   2373  1.1.1.4  christos 		    }
   2374      1.1     skrll 		}
   2375      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2376      1.1     skrll 		unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2377      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2378      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2379      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2380      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2381      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2382      1.1     skrll 
   2383      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2384      1.1     skrll 
   2385      1.1     skrll 	      /* The offset must always be a multiple of 8.  We use
   2386      1.1     skrll 		 the least significant bit to record whether we have
   2387      1.1     skrll 		 already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   2388      1.1     skrll 	      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2389      1.1     skrll 		off &= ~1;
   2390      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2391      1.1     skrll 		{
   2392      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, relocation,
   2393  1.1.1.3  christos 			      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2394      1.1     skrll 
   2395  1.1.1.4  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2396      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2397      1.1     skrll 		      asection *s;
   2398      1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2399      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   2400      1.1     skrll 
   2401  1.1.1.3  christos 		      s = htab->elf.srelgot;
   2402      1.1     skrll 		      if (s == NULL)
   2403      1.1     skrll 			abort ();
   2404      1.1     skrll 
   2405  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2406  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   2407      1.1     skrll 					 + off);
   2408      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2409      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   2410      1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   2411      1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2412      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2413      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2414      1.1     skrll 
   2415      1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   2416      1.1     skrll 		}
   2417      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2418      1.1     skrll 
   2419      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   2420      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2421      1.1     skrll 
   2422  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = base_got->output_offset + off;
   2423      1.1     skrll 
   2424      1.1     skrll 	  /* For @GOTENT the relocation is against the offset between
   2425      1.1     skrll 	     the instruction and the symbols entry in the GOT and not
   2426      1.1     skrll 	     between the start of the GOT and the symbols entry. We
   2427      1.1     skrll 	     add the vma of the GOT to get the correct value.  */
   2428      1.1     skrll 	  if (   r_type == R_390_GOTENT
   2429      1.1     skrll 	      || r_type == R_390_GOTPLTENT)
   2430  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation += base_got->output_section->vma;
   2431      1.1     skrll 
   2432      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2433      1.1     skrll 
   2434      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF16:
   2435      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF32:
   2436      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTOFF64:
   2437      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is relative to the start of the global offset
   2438      1.1     skrll 	     table.  */
   2439      1.1     skrll 
   2440  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2441  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2442  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2443  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && !bfd_link_executable (info))
   2444  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2445  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2446  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2447  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset
   2448  1.1.1.4  christos 			    - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2449  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2450  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2451  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2452      1.1     skrll 	  /* Note that sgot->output_offset is not involved in this
   2453      1.1     skrll 	     calculation.  We always want the start of .got.  If we
   2454      1.1     skrll 	     defined _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE in a different way, as is
   2455      1.1     skrll 	     permitted by the ABI, we might have to change this
   2456      1.1     skrll 	     calculation.  */
   2457  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2458      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2459      1.1     skrll 
   2460      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPC:
   2461      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_GOTPCDBL:
   2462      1.1     skrll 	  /* Use global offset table as symbol value.  */
   2463  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2464      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2465      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2466      1.1     skrll 
   2467  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT12DBL:
   2468      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT16DBL:
   2469  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PLT24DBL:
   2470      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32:
   2471      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT32DBL:
   2472      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLT64:
   2473      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2474      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table.  */
   2475      1.1     skrll 
   2476      1.1     skrll 	  /* Resolve a PLT32 reloc against a local symbol directly,
   2477      1.1     skrll 	     without using the procedure linkage table.  */
   2478      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   2479      1.1     skrll 	    break;
   2480      1.1     skrll 
   2481      1.1     skrll 	  if (h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2482  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2483      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2484      1.1     skrll 	      /* We didn't make a PLT entry for this symbol.  This
   2485      1.1     skrll 		 happens when statically linking PIC code, or when
   2486      1.1     skrll 		 using -Bsymbolic.  */
   2487      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2488      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2489  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2490  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2491  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2492  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2493  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2494  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2495  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2496  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset);
   2497      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2498      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2499      1.1     skrll 
   2500      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF16:
   2501      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF32:
   2502      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PLTOFF64:
   2503      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   2504      1.1     skrll 	     procedure linkage table relative to the start of the GOT.  */
   2505      1.1     skrll 
   2506      1.1     skrll 	  /* For local symbols or if we didn't make a PLT entry for
   2507      1.1     skrll 	     this symbol resolve the symbol directly.  */
   2508  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h == NULL
   2509      1.1     skrll 	      || h->plt.offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2510  1.1.1.4  christos 	      || (htab->elf.splt == NULL && !s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)))
   2511      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2512  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation -= htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2513      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   2514      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2515      1.1     skrll 
   2516  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   2517  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2518  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2519  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2520  1.1.1.3  christos 			  - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2521  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   2522  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation = (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   2523  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   2524  1.1.1.3  christos 			  + h->plt.offset
   2525  1.1.1.3  christos 			  - htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma);
   2526      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2527      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2528      1.1     skrll 
   2529      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16:
   2530  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC12DBL:
   2531      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC16DBL:
   2532  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_PC24DBL:
   2533      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32:
   2534      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC32DBL:
   2535      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_PC64:
   2536  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2537  1.1.1.6  christos 	      && bfd_link_pie (info)
   2538  1.1.1.6  christos 	      && !h->def_regular)
   2539  1.1.1.6  christos 	    {
   2540  1.1.1.7  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: `%s' non-PLT reloc for symbol defined "
   2541  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "in shared library and accessed "
   2542  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "from executable "
   2543  1.1.1.6  christos 				    "(rebuild file with -fPIC ?)"),
   2544  1.1.1.6  christos 				  input_bfd, h->root.root.string);
   2545  1.1.1.6  christos 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2546  1.1.1.6  christos 	      return FALSE;
   2547  1.1.1.6  christos 	    }
   2548  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* The target of these relocs are instruction operands
   2549  1.1.1.4  christos 	     residing in read-only sections.  We cannot emit a runtime
   2550  1.1.1.4  christos 	     reloc for it.  */
   2551  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2552  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2553  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && h->def_regular
   2554  1.1.1.4  christos 	      && bfd_link_pic (info))
   2555  1.1.1.4  christos 	    {
   2556  1.1.1.4  christos 	      relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2557  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2558  1.1.1.4  christos 			    + h->plt.offset);
   2559  1.1.1.4  christos 	      goto do_relocation;
   2560  1.1.1.4  christos 	    }
   2561  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2562  1.1.1.4  christos 
   2563  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_8:
   2564  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_16:
   2565  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_32:
   2566  1.1.1.4  christos 	case R_390_64:
   2567  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2568  1.1.1.7  christos 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   2569  1.1.1.7  christos 	    break;
   2570  1.1.1.7  christos 
   2571  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h != NULL
   2572  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h)
   2573  1.1.1.3  christos 	      && h->def_regular)
   2574  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   2575  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   2576  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2577  1.1.1.6  christos 		  /* For a non-shared object the symbol will not
   2578  1.1.1.6  christos 		     change.  Hence we can write the address of the
   2579  1.1.1.6  christos 		     target IPLT slot now.  */
   2580  1.1.1.3  christos 		  relocation = (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   2581  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   2582  1.1.1.3  christos 				+ h ->plt.offset);
   2583  1.1.1.3  christos 		  goto do_relocation;
   2584  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2585  1.1.1.3  christos 	      else
   2586  1.1.1.3  christos 		{
   2587  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* For shared objects a runtime relocation is needed.  */
   2588  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2589  1.1.1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2590  1.1.1.3  christos 		  asection *sreloc;
   2591  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2592  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* Need a dynamic relocation to get the real function
   2593  1.1.1.3  christos 		     address.  */
   2594  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset = _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd,
   2595  1.1.1.3  christos 							     info,
   2596  1.1.1.3  christos 							     input_section,
   2597  1.1.1.3  christos 							     rel->r_offset);
   2598  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   2599  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2600  1.1.1.3  christos 		    abort ();
   2601  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2602  1.1.1.3  christos 		  outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2603  1.1.1.3  christos 				      + input_section->output_offset);
   2604  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2605  1.1.1.3  christos 		  if (h->dynindx == -1
   2606  1.1.1.3  christos 		      || h->forced_local
   2607  1.1.1.4  christos 		      || bfd_link_executable (info))
   2608  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2609  1.1.1.3  christos 		      /* This symbol is resolved locally.  */
   2610  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   2611  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   2612  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   2613  1.1.1.3  christos 					 + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   2614  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2615  1.1.1.3  christos 		  else
   2616  1.1.1.3  christos 		    {
   2617  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2618  1.1.1.3  christos 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2619  1.1.1.3  christos 		    }
   2620  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2621  1.1.1.3  christos 		  sreloc = htab->elf.irelifunc;
   2622  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_append_rela (output_bfd, sreloc, &outrel);
   2623  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2624  1.1.1.3  christos 		  /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we
   2625  1.1.1.3  christos 		     do not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise,
   2626  1.1.1.3  christos 		     we need to include the symbol value so that it
   2627  1.1.1.3  christos 		     becomes an addend for the dynamic reloc.  For an
   2628  1.1.1.3  christos 		     internal symbol, we have updated addend.  */
   2629  1.1.1.3  christos 		  continue;
   2630  1.1.1.3  christos 		}
   2631  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   2632  1.1.1.3  christos 
   2633  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   2634      1.1     skrll 	       && (h == NULL
   2635  1.1.1.6  christos 		   || (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   2636  1.1.1.6  christos 		       && !resolved_to_zero)
   2637      1.1     skrll 		   || h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2638      1.1     skrll 	       && ((r_type != R_390_PC16
   2639  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC12DBL
   2640      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC16DBL
   2641  1.1.1.4  christos 		    && r_type != R_390_PC24DBL
   2642      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32
   2643      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC32DBL
   2644      1.1     skrll 		    && r_type != R_390_PC64)
   2645  1.1.1.2  christos 		   || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, h)))
   2646      1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   2647  1.1.1.4  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2648      1.1     skrll 		  && h != NULL
   2649      1.1     skrll 		  && h->dynindx != -1
   2650      1.1     skrll 		  && !h->non_got_ref
   2651      1.1     skrll 		  && ((h->def_dynamic
   2652      1.1     skrll 		       && !h->def_regular)
   2653      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   2654      1.1     skrll 		      || h->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
   2655      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2656      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2657      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip, relocate;
   2658      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2659      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2660      1.1     skrll 
   2661      1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   2662      1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   2663      1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   2664      1.1     skrll 	      skip = FALSE;
   2665      1.1     skrll 	      relocate = FALSE;
   2666      1.1     skrll 
   2667      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   2668      1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   2669      1.1     skrll 					 rel->r_offset);
   2670      1.1     skrll 	      if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1)
   2671      1.1     skrll 		skip = TRUE;
   2672      1.1     skrll 	      else if (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2)
   2673      1.1     skrll 		skip = TRUE, relocate = TRUE;
   2674      1.1     skrll 
   2675      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_section->vma
   2676      1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_offset);
   2677      1.1     skrll 
   2678      1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   2679      1.1     skrll 		memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof outrel);
   2680      1.1     skrll 	      else if (h != NULL
   2681      1.1     skrll 		       && h->dynindx != -1
   2682      1.1     skrll 		       && (r_type == R_390_PC16
   2683  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC12DBL
   2684      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC16DBL
   2685  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   2686      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32
   2687      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC32DBL
   2688      1.1     skrll 			   || r_type == R_390_PC64
   2689  1.1.1.4  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   2690  1.1.1.2  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, h)
   2691      1.1     skrll 			   || !h->def_regular))
   2692      1.1     skrll 		{
   2693      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, r_type);
   2694      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = rel->r_addend;
   2695      1.1     skrll 		}
   2696      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2697      1.1     skrll 		{
   2698      1.1     skrll 		  /* This symbol is local, or marked to become local.  */
   2699      1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend = relocation + rel->r_addend;
   2700      1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type == R_390_64)
   2701      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2702      1.1     skrll 		      relocate = TRUE;
   2703      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2704      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2705      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2706      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2707      1.1     skrll 		      long sindx;
   2708      1.1     skrll 
   2709      1.1     skrll 		      if (bfd_is_abs_section (sec))
   2710      1.1     skrll 			sindx = 0;
   2711      1.1     skrll 		      else if (sec == NULL || sec->owner == NULL)
   2712      1.1     skrll 			{
   2713      1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error(bfd_error_bad_value);
   2714      1.1     skrll 			  return FALSE;
   2715      1.1     skrll 			}
   2716      1.1     skrll 		      else
   2717      1.1     skrll 			{
   2718      1.1     skrll 			  asection *osec;
   2719      1.1     skrll 
   2720      1.1     skrll 			  osec = sec->output_section;
   2721      1.1     skrll 			  sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2722      1.1     skrll 
   2723      1.1     skrll 			  if (sindx == 0)
   2724      1.1     skrll 			    {
   2725      1.1     skrll 			      osec = htab->elf.text_index_section;
   2726      1.1     skrll 			      sindx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   2727      1.1     skrll 			    }
   2728      1.1     skrll 			  BFD_ASSERT (sindx != 0);
   2729      1.1     skrll 
   2730      1.1     skrll 			  /* We are turning this relocation into one
   2731      1.1     skrll 			     against a section symbol, so subtract out
   2732      1.1     skrll 			     the output section's address but not the
   2733      1.1     skrll 			     offset of the input section in the output
   2734      1.1     skrll 			     section.  */
   2735      1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   2736      1.1     skrll 			}
   2737      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (sindx, r_type);
   2738      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2739      1.1     skrll 		}
   2740      1.1     skrll 
   2741      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2742      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2743      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2744      1.1     skrll 
   2745      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2746      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2747      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2748      1.1     skrll 
   2749      1.1     skrll 	      /* If this reloc is against an external symbol, we do
   2750      1.1     skrll 		 not want to fiddle with the addend.  Otherwise, we
   2751      1.1     skrll 		 need to include the symbol value so that it becomes
   2752      1.1     skrll 		 an addend for the dynamic reloc.  */
   2753      1.1     skrll 	      if (! relocate)
   2754      1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2755      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2756      1.1     skrll 
   2757      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2758      1.1     skrll 
   2759      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls literal pool entries.  */
   2760      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IE64:
   2761  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2762      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2763      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2764      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2765      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2766      1.1     skrll 
   2767      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   2768      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   2769      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   2770      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   2771      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2772      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2773      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2774      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2775      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2776      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2777      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2778      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   2779      1.1     skrll 
   2780      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GD64:
   2781      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE64:
   2782      1.1     skrll 	  r_type = elf_s390_tls_transition (info, r_type, h == NULL);
   2783      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   2784      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   2785      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   2786      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   2787      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2788      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2789  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && h->dynindx == -1 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2790      1.1     skrll 		r_type = R_390_TLS_LE64;
   2791      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2792      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64 && tls_type >= GOT_TLS_IE)
   2793      1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_390_TLS_IE64;
   2794      1.1     skrll 
   2795      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LE64)
   2796      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2797      1.1     skrll 	      /* This relocation gets optimized away by the local exec
   2798      1.1     skrll 		 access optimization.  */
   2799      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2800      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2801      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2802      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   2803      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2804      1.1     skrll 
   2805  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2806      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2807      1.1     skrll 
   2808      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   2809      1.1     skrll 	    off = h->got.offset;
   2810      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2811      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2812      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2813      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2814      1.1     skrll 
   2815      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2816      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2817      1.1     skrll 
   2818      1.1     skrll 	emit_tls_relocs:
   2819      1.1     skrll 
   2820      1.1     skrll 	  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   2821      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   2822      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2823      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2824      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2825      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2826      1.1     skrll 	      int dr_type, indx;
   2827      1.1     skrll 
   2828  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   2829      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2830      1.1     skrll 
   2831  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2832  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   2833      1.1     skrll 
   2834      1.1     skrll 	      indx = h && h->dynindx != -1 ? h->dynindx : 0;
   2835      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   2836      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_DTPMOD;
   2837      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2838      1.1     skrll 		dr_type = R_390_TLS_TPOFF;
   2839      1.1     skrll 	      if (dr_type == R_390_TLS_TPOFF && indx == 0)
   2840      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   2841      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2842      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2843      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, dr_type);
   2844  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   2845  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   2846      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2847      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2848      1.1     skrll 
   2849      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GD64)
   2850      1.1     skrll 		{
   2851      1.1     skrll 		  if (indx == 0)
   2852      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2853  1.1.1.6  christos 		      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2854      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   2855      1.1     skrll 				  relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   2856  1.1.1.3  christos 				  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   2857      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2858      1.1     skrll 		  else
   2859      1.1     skrll 		    {
   2860      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_DTPOFF);
   2861      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2862      1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2863  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   2864      1.1     skrll 		      loc += sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2865      1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2866      1.1     skrll 		    }
   2867      1.1     skrll 		}
   2868      1.1     skrll 
   2869      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL)
   2870      1.1     skrll 		h->got.offset |= 1;
   2871      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2872      1.1     skrll 		local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   2873      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2874      1.1     skrll 
   2875      1.1     skrll 	  if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   2876      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2877      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == ELF64_R_TYPE (rel->r_info))
   2878      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2879  1.1.1.3  christos 	      relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2880      1.1     skrll 	      if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IE64 || r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   2881  1.1.1.3  christos 		relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2882      1.1     skrll 	      unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2883      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2884      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2885      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2886  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off,
   2887      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2888      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   2889      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2890      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2891      1.1     skrll 
   2892      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE12:
   2893      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GOTIE20:
   2894      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_IEENT:
   2895      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL)
   2896      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2897      1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   2898      1.1     skrll 		abort();
   2899      1.1     skrll 	      off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   2900  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2901      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   2902      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2903      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2904      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2905      1.1     skrll 	      off = h->got.offset;
   2906      1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   2907  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (bfd_link_pic (info) || h->dynindx != -1 || tls_type < GOT_TLS_IE)
   2908      1.1     skrll 		goto emit_tls_relocs;
   2909      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2910      1.1     skrll 
   2911  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2912      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2913      1.1     skrll 
   2914      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2915      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2916  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgot->contents + off);
   2917  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2918      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_IEENT)
   2919  1.1.1.3  christos 	    relocation += htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma;
   2920      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2921      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2922      1.1     skrll 
   2923      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDM64:
   2924  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   2925      1.1     skrll 	    /* The literal pool entry this relocation refers to gets ignored
   2926      1.1     skrll 	       by the optimized code of the local exec model. Do nothing
   2927      1.1     skrll 	       and the value will turn out zero.  */
   2928      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2929      1.1     skrll 
   2930  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   2931      1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2932      1.1     skrll 
   2933      1.1     skrll 	  off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   2934      1.1     skrll 	  if (off & 1)
   2935      1.1     skrll 	    off &= ~1;
   2936      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2937      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2938      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2939      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2940      1.1     skrll 
   2941  1.1.1.3  christos 	      if (htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   2942      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2943      1.1     skrll 
   2944  1.1.1.3  christos 	      outrel.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   2945  1.1.1.3  christos 				 + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off);
   2946      1.1     skrll 
   2947      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, 0,
   2948  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + off + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   2949      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_TLS_DTPMOD);
   2950      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2951  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   2952  1.1.1.3  christos 	      loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++
   2953      1.1     skrll 		* sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2954      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2955      1.1     skrll 	      htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   2956      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2957  1.1.1.3  christos 	  relocation = htab->elf.sgot->output_offset + off;
   2958      1.1     skrll 	  unresolved_reloc = FALSE;
   2959      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   2960      1.1     skrll 
   2961      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LE64:
   2962  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   2963      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2964      1.1     skrll 	      /* Linking a shared library with non-fpic code requires
   2965      1.1     skrll 		 a R_390_TLS_TPOFF relocation.  */
   2966      1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   2967      1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   2968      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   2969      1.1     skrll 	      int indx;
   2970      1.1     skrll 
   2971      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset = rel->r_offset
   2972      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_section->vma
   2973      1.1     skrll 				+ input_section->output_offset;
   2974      1.1     skrll 	      if (h != NULL && h->dynindx != -1)
   2975      1.1     skrll 		indx = h->dynindx;
   2976      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2977      1.1     skrll 		indx = 0;
   2978      1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (indx, R_390_TLS_TPOFF);
   2979      1.1     skrll 	      if (indx == 0)
   2980      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   2981      1.1     skrll 	      else
   2982      1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   2983      1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   2984      1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   2985      1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   2986      1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   2987      1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   2988      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   2989      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2990      1.1     skrll 	  else
   2991      1.1     skrll 	    {
   2992      1.1     skrll 	      BFD_ASSERT (! unresolved_reloc);
   2993      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, -tpoff (info, relocation),
   2994      1.1     skrll 			  contents + rel->r_offset);
   2995      1.1     skrll 	    }
   2996      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2997      1.1     skrll 
   2998      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDO64:
   2999  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info) || (input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING))
   3000      1.1     skrll 	    relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   3001      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3002      1.1     skrll 	    /* When converting LDO to LE, we must negate.  */
   3003      1.1     skrll 	    relocation = -tpoff (info, relocation);
   3004      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3005      1.1     skrll 
   3006      1.1     skrll 	  /* Relocations for tls instructions.  */
   3007      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LOAD:
   3008      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_GDCALL:
   3009      1.1     skrll 	case R_390_TLS_LDCALL:
   3010      1.1     skrll 	  tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   3011      1.1     skrll 	  if (h == NULL && local_got_offsets)
   3012      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd) [r_symndx];
   3013      1.1     skrll 	  else if (h != NULL)
   3014      1.1     skrll 	    tls_type = elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type;
   3015      1.1     skrll 
   3016      1.1     skrll 	  if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_GD)
   3017      1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   3018      1.1     skrll 
   3019      1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LOAD)
   3020      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3021  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   3022      1.1     skrll 		{
   3023      1.1     skrll 		  /* IE->LE transition. Four valid cases:
   3024      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(0,%ry)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3025      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,0)    -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3026      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0
   3027      1.1     skrll 		     lg %rx,(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3028      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1, ry;
   3029      1.1     skrll 
   3030      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3031      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3032      1.1     skrll 		  if (insn1 != 0x0004)
   3033  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   3034  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3035  1.1.1.6  christos 		      return FALSE;
   3036  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   3037      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe3000000)
   3038      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,0) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3039      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   3040      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe3000000)
   3041      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(0,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3042      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   3043      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff00f000) == 0xe300c000)
   3044      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%ry,%r12) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3045      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x000f0000);
   3046      1.1     skrll 		  else if ((insn0 & 0xff0f0000) == 0xe30c0000)
   3047      1.1     skrll 		    /* lg %rx,0(%r12,%ry) -> sllg %rx,%ry,0  */
   3048      1.1     skrll 		    ry = (insn0 & 0x0000f000) << 4;
   3049      1.1     skrll 		  else
   3050  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   3051  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3052  1.1.1.6  christos 		      return FALSE;
   3053  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   3054      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xeb000000 | (insn0 & 0x00f00000) | ry;
   3055      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x000d;
   3056      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3057      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3058      1.1     skrll 		}
   3059      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3060      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_GDCALL)
   3061      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3062      1.1     skrll 	      unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   3063      1.1     skrll 
   3064      1.1     skrll 	      insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3065      1.1     skrll 	      insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3066      1.1     skrll 	      if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   3067  1.1.1.6  christos 		{
   3068  1.1.1.6  christos 		  invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3069  1.1.1.6  christos 		  return FALSE;
   3070  1.1.1.6  christos 		}
   3071  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && (h == NULL || h->dynindx == -1))
   3072      1.1     skrll 		{
   3073      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->LE transition.
   3074      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   3075      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   3076      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   3077      1.1     skrll 		}
   3078      1.1     skrll 	      else
   3079      1.1     skrll 		{
   3080      1.1     skrll 		  /* GD->IE transition.
   3081      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> lg %r2,0(%r2,%r12)  */
   3082      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xe322c000;
   3083      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0004;
   3084      1.1     skrll 		}
   3085      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3086      1.1     skrll 	      bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3087      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3088      1.1     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_390_TLS_LDCALL)
   3089      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3090  1.1.1.4  christos 	      if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3091      1.1     skrll 		{
   3092      1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int insn0, insn1;
   3093      1.1     skrll 
   3094      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3095      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = bfd_get_16 (input_bfd, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3096      1.1     skrll 		  if ((insn0 & 0xffff0000) != 0xc0e50000)
   3097  1.1.1.6  christos 		    {
   3098  1.1.1.6  christos 		      invalid_tls_insn (input_bfd, input_section, rel);
   3099  1.1.1.6  christos 		      return FALSE;
   3100  1.1.1.6  christos 		    }
   3101      1.1     skrll 		  /* LD->LE transition.
   3102      1.1     skrll 		     brasl %r14,__tls_get_addr@plt -> brcl 0,. */
   3103      1.1     skrll 		  insn0 = 0xc0040000;
   3104      1.1     skrll 		  insn1 = 0x0000;
   3105      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, insn0, contents + rel->r_offset);
   3106      1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_16 (output_bfd, insn1, contents + rel->r_offset + 4);
   3107      1.1     skrll 		}
   3108      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3109      1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   3110      1.1     skrll 
   3111      1.1     skrll 	default:
   3112      1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3113      1.1     skrll 	}
   3114      1.1     skrll 
   3115      1.1     skrll       /* Dynamic relocs are not propagated for SEC_DEBUGGING sections
   3116      1.1     skrll 	 because such sections are not SEC_ALLOC and thus ld.so will
   3117      1.1     skrll 	 not process them.  */
   3118      1.1     skrll       if (unresolved_reloc
   3119      1.1     skrll 	  && !((input_section->flags & SEC_DEBUGGING) != 0
   3120  1.1.1.3  christos 	       && h->def_dynamic)
   3121  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && _bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3122  1.1.1.3  christos 				      rel->r_offset) != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3123  1.1.1.6  christos 	_bfd_error_handler
   3124  1.1.1.6  christos 	  /* xgettext:c-format */
   3125  1.1.1.7  christos 	  (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
   3126  1.1.1.7  christos 	     "unresolvable %s relocation against symbol `%s'"),
   3127      1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd,
   3128      1.1     skrll 	   input_section,
   3129  1.1.1.7  christos 	   (uint64_t) rel->r_offset,
   3130      1.1     skrll 	   howto->name,
   3131      1.1     skrll 	   h->root.root.string);
   3132      1.1     skrll 
   3133  1.1.1.3  christos     do_relocation:
   3134  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3135  1.1.1.4  christos       /* When applying a 24 bit reloc we need to start one byte
   3136  1.1.1.4  christos 	 earlier.  Otherwise the 32 bit get/put bfd operations might
   3137  1.1.1.4  christos 	 access a byte after the actual section.  */
   3138  1.1.1.4  christos       if (r_type == R_390_PC24DBL
   3139  1.1.1.4  christos 	  || r_type == R_390_PLT24DBL)
   3140  1.1.1.4  christos 	rel->r_offset--;
   3141  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3142      1.1     skrll       if (r_type == R_390_20
   3143      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOT20
   3144      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_GOTPLT20
   3145      1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == R_390_TLS_GOTIE20)
   3146      1.1     skrll 	{
   3147      1.1     skrll 	  relocation += rel->r_addend;
   3148      1.1     skrll 	  relocation = (relocation&0xfff) << 8 | (relocation&0xff000) >> 12;
   3149      1.1     skrll 	  r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3150      1.1     skrll 					contents, rel->r_offset,
   3151      1.1     skrll 					relocation, 0);
   3152      1.1     skrll 	}
   3153      1.1     skrll       else
   3154      1.1     skrll 	r = _bfd_final_link_relocate (howto, input_bfd, input_section,
   3155      1.1     skrll 				      contents, rel->r_offset,
   3156      1.1     skrll 				      relocation, rel->r_addend);
   3157      1.1     skrll 
   3158      1.1     skrll       if (r != bfd_reloc_ok)
   3159      1.1     skrll 	{
   3160      1.1     skrll 	  const char *name;
   3161      1.1     skrll 
   3162      1.1     skrll 	  if (h != NULL)
   3163      1.1     skrll 	    name = h->root.root.string;
   3164      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3165      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3166      1.1     skrll 	      name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   3167      1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   3168      1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   3169      1.1     skrll 	      if (name == NULL)
   3170      1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   3171      1.1     skrll 	      if (*name == '\0')
   3172      1.1     skrll 		name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sec);
   3173      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3174      1.1     skrll 
   3175      1.1     skrll 	  if (r == bfd_reloc_overflow)
   3176  1.1.1.5  christos 	    (*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   3177  1.1.1.5  christos 	      (info, (h ? &h->root : NULL), name, howto->name,
   3178  1.1.1.5  christos 	       (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rel->r_offset);
   3179      1.1     skrll 	  else
   3180      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3181  1.1.1.6  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   3182  1.1.1.6  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   3183  1.1.1.7  christos 		(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): reloc against `%s': error %d"),
   3184      1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd, input_section,
   3185  1.1.1.7  christos 		 (uint64_t) rel->r_offset, name, (int) r);
   3186      1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   3187      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3188      1.1     skrll 	}
   3189      1.1     skrll     }
   3190      1.1     skrll 
   3191      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3192      1.1     skrll }
   3193      1.1     skrll 
   3194  1.1.1.3  christos /* Generate the PLT slots together with the dynamic relocations needed
   3195  1.1.1.3  christos    for IFUNC symbols.  */
   3196  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3197  1.1.1.3  christos static void
   3198  1.1.1.3  christos elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3199  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3200  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3201  1.1.1.3  christos 			      struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab,
   3202  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma plt_offset,
   3203  1.1.1.3  christos 			      bfd_vma resolver_address)
   3204  1.1.1.3  christos {
   3205  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma plt_index;
   3206  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_vma got_offset;
   3207  1.1.1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3208  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_byte *loc;
   3209  1.1.1.3  christos   asection *plt, *gotplt, *relplt;
   3210  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3211  1.1.1.3  christos   if (htab->elf.iplt == NULL
   3212  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.igotplt == NULL
   3213  1.1.1.3  christos       || htab->elf.irelplt == NULL)
   3214  1.1.1.3  christos     abort ();
   3215  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3216  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Index of the PLT slot within iplt section.  */
   3217  1.1.1.3  christos   plt_index = plt_offset / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3218  1.1.1.3  christos   plt = htab->elf.iplt;
   3219  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Offset into the igot.plt section.  */
   3220  1.1.1.3  christos   got_offset = plt_index * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3221  1.1.1.3  christos   gotplt = htab->elf.igotplt;
   3222  1.1.1.3  christos   relplt = htab->elf.irelplt;
   3223  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3224  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3225  1.1.1.3  christos   memcpy (plt->contents + plt_offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3226  1.1.1.3  christos 	  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3227  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3228  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
   3229  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3230  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (gotplt->output_section->vma +
   3231  1.1.1.3  christos 	       gotplt->output_offset + got_offset
   3232  1.1.1.3  christos 	       - (plt->output_section->vma +
   3233  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt->output_offset +
   3234  1.1.1.3  christos 		  plt_offset))/2,
   3235  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 2);
   3236  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3237  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (plt->output_offset +
   3238  1.1.1.3  christos 			     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3239  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 24);
   3240  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3241  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relplt->output_offset +
   3242  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3243  1.1.1.3  christos 	      plt->contents + plt_offset + 28);
   3244  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3245  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3246  1.1.1.3  christos      Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3247  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3248  1.1.1.3  christos 	      (plt->output_section->vma
   3249  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt->output_offset
   3250  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + plt_offset
   3251  1.1.1.3  christos 	       + 14),
   3252  1.1.1.3  christos 	      gotplt->contents + got_offset);
   3253  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3254  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3255  1.1.1.3  christos   rela.r_offset = (gotplt->output_section->vma
   3256  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + gotplt->output_offset
   3257  1.1.1.3  christos 		   + got_offset);
   3258  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3259  1.1.1.3  christos   if (!h
   3260  1.1.1.3  christos       || h->dynindx == -1
   3261  1.1.1.4  christos       || ((bfd_link_executable (info)
   3262  1.1.1.3  christos 	   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (h->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   3263  1.1.1.3  christos 	  && h->def_regular))
   3264  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3265  1.1.1.3  christos       /* The symbol can be locally resolved.  */
   3266  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_IRELATIVE);
   3267  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = resolver_address;
   3268  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3269  1.1.1.3  christos   else
   3270  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3271  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3272  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3273  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3274  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3275  1.1.1.3  christos   loc = relplt->contents + plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3276  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3277  1.1.1.3  christos }
   3278  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3279  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3280      1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   3281      1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   3282      1.1     skrll 
   3283      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3284  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   3285  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3286  1.1.1.2  christos 				struct elf_link_hash_entry *h,
   3287  1.1.1.2  christos 				Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   3288      1.1     skrll {
   3289      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3290  1.1.1.3  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry *eh = (struct elf_s390_link_hash_entry*)h;
   3291      1.1     skrll 
   3292      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3293  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3294  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   3295      1.1     skrll 
   3296      1.1     skrll   if (h->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3297      1.1     skrll     {
   3298      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma plt_index;
   3299      1.1     skrll       bfd_vma got_offset;
   3300      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3301      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3302      1.1     skrll 
   3303      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   3304      1.1     skrll 	 it up.  */
   3305  1.1.1.4  christos       if (s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h) && h->def_regular)
   3306  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3307  1.1.1.4  christos 	  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, h,
   3308  1.1.1.4  christos 	    htab, h->plt.offset,
   3309  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_address +
   3310  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_offset +
   3311  1.1.1.4  christos 	    eh->ifunc_resolver_section->output_section->vma);
   3312  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3313  1.1.1.4  christos 	  /* Do not return yet.  Handling of explicit GOT slots of
   3314  1.1.1.4  christos 	     IFUNC symbols is below.  */
   3315  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3316  1.1.1.3  christos       else
   3317  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3318  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (h->dynindx == -1
   3319  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.splt == NULL
   3320  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.sgotplt == NULL
   3321  1.1.1.3  christos 	      || htab->elf.srelplt == NULL)
   3322  1.1.1.3  christos 	    abort ();
   3323      1.1     skrll 
   3324  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Calc. index no.
   3325  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Current offset - size first entry / entry size.  */
   3326  1.1.1.3  christos 	  plt_index = (h->plt.offset - PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE) / PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3327  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3328  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Offset in GOT is PLT index plus GOT headers(3) times 8,
   3329  1.1.1.3  christos 	     addr & GOT addr.  */
   3330  1.1.1.3  christos 	  got_offset = (plt_index + 3) * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3331  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3332  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the blueprint of a PLT.  */
   3333  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset, elf_s390x_plt_entry,
   3334  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3335      1.1     skrll 
   3336  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup the relative address to the GOT entry */
   3337  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3338  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma +
   3339  1.1.1.3  christos 		       htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset + got_offset
   3340  1.1.1.3  christos 		       - (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma +
   3341  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.splt->output_offset +
   3342  1.1.1.3  christos 			  h->plt.offset))/2,
   3343  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 2);
   3344  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup the relative branch to PLT 0 */
   3345  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, - (PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE +
   3346  1.1.1.3  christos 				     (PLT_ENTRY_SIZE * plt_index) + 22)/2,
   3347  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 24);
   3348  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fixup offset into .rela.plt section.  */
   3349  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, plt_index * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3350  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + h->plt.offset + 28);
   3351      1.1     skrll 
   3352  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the global offset table.
   3353  1.1.1.3  christos 	     Points to instruction after GOT offset.  */
   3354  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3355  1.1.1.3  christos 		      (htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3356  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.splt->output_offset
   3357  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + h->plt.offset
   3358  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + 14),
   3359  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + got_offset);
   3360  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3361  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* Fill in the entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   3362  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
   3363  1.1.1.3  christos 			   + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
   3364  1.1.1.3  christos 			   + got_offset);
   3365  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_JMP_SLOT);
   3366  1.1.1.3  christos 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3367  1.1.1.3  christos 	  loc = htab->elf.srelplt->contents + plt_index *
   3368  1.1.1.3  christos 	    sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3369  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3370  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3371  1.1.1.3  christos 	  if (!h->def_regular)
   3372  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3373  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   3374  1.1.1.3  christos 		 the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  This is a clue
   3375  1.1.1.3  christos 		 for the dynamic linker, to make function pointer
   3376  1.1.1.3  christos 		 comparisons work between an application and shared
   3377  1.1.1.3  christos 		 library.  */
   3378  1.1.1.3  christos 	      sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   3379  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3380      1.1     skrll 	}
   3381      1.1     skrll     }
   3382      1.1     skrll 
   3383      1.1     skrll   if (h->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3384      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_GD
   3385      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE
   3386      1.1     skrll       && elf_s390_hash_entry(h)->tls_type != GOT_TLS_IE_NLT)
   3387      1.1     skrll     {
   3388      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3389      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3390      1.1     skrll 
   3391      1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set it
   3392      1.1     skrll 	 up.  */
   3393  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.sgot == NULL || htab->elf.srelgot == NULL)
   3394      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3395      1.1     skrll 
   3396  1.1.1.3  christos       rela.r_offset = (htab->elf.sgot->output_section->vma
   3397  1.1.1.3  christos 		       + htab->elf.sgot->output_offset
   3398      1.1     skrll 		       + (h->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1));
   3399      1.1     skrll 
   3400  1.1.1.3  christos       if (h->def_regular && s390_is_ifunc_symbol_p (h))
   3401  1.1.1.3  christos 	{
   3402  1.1.1.4  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3403  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3404  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* An explicit GOT slot usage needs GLOB_DAT.  If the
   3405  1.1.1.3  christos 		 symbol references local the implicit got.iplt slot
   3406  1.1.1.3  christos 		 will be used and the IRELATIVE reloc has been created
   3407  1.1.1.3  christos 		 above.  */
   3408  1.1.1.3  christos 	      goto do_glob_dat;
   3409  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3410  1.1.1.3  christos 	  else
   3411  1.1.1.3  christos 	    {
   3412  1.1.1.3  christos 	      /* For non-shared objects explicit GOT slots must be
   3413  1.1.1.3  christos 		 filled with the PLT slot address for pointer
   3414  1.1.1.3  christos 		 equality reasons.  */
   3415  1.1.1.3  christos 	      bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (htab->elf.iplt->output_section->vma
   3416  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + htab->elf.iplt->output_offset
   3417  1.1.1.3  christos 				       + h->plt.offset),
   3418  1.1.1.3  christos 			  htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3419  1.1.1.3  christos 	      return TRUE;
   3420  1.1.1.3  christos 	    }
   3421  1.1.1.3  christos 	}
   3422  1.1.1.4  christos       else if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3423  1.1.1.6  christos 	       && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, h))
   3424      1.1     skrll 	{
   3425  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, h))
   3426  1.1.1.6  christos 	    return TRUE;
   3427  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3428  1.1.1.3  christos 	  /* If this is a static link, or it is a -Bsymbolic link and
   3429  1.1.1.3  christos 	     the symbol is defined locally or was forced to be local
   3430  1.1.1.3  christos 	     because of a version file, we just want to emit a
   3431  1.1.1.3  christos 	     RELATIVE reloc.  The entry in the global offset table
   3432  1.1.1.3  christos 	     will already have been initialized in the
   3433  1.1.1.3  christos 	     relocate_section function.  */
   3434  1.1.1.6  christos 	  if (!(h->def_regular || ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (h)))
   3435  1.1.1.2  christos 	    return FALSE;
   3436      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) != 0);
   3437      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (0, R_390_RELATIVE);
   3438      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = (h->root.u.def.value
   3439      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3440      1.1     skrll 			   + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3441      1.1     skrll 	}
   3442      1.1     skrll       else
   3443      1.1     skrll 	{
   3444      1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT((h->got.offset & 1) == 0);
   3445  1.1.1.6  christos 	do_glob_dat:
   3446  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgot->contents + h->got.offset);
   3447      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_GLOB_DAT);
   3448      1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   3449      1.1     skrll 	}
   3450      1.1     skrll 
   3451  1.1.1.3  christos       loc = htab->elf.srelgot->contents;
   3452  1.1.1.3  christos       loc += htab->elf.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3453      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3454      1.1     skrll     }
   3455      1.1     skrll 
   3456      1.1     skrll   if (h->needs_copy)
   3457      1.1     skrll     {
   3458      1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   3459  1.1.1.6  christos       asection *s;
   3460      1.1     skrll       bfd_byte *loc;
   3461      1.1     skrll 
   3462      1.1     skrll       /* This symbols needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   3463      1.1     skrll 
   3464      1.1     skrll       if (h->dynindx == -1
   3465      1.1     skrll 	  || (h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3466      1.1     skrll 	      && h->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   3467  1.1.1.6  christos 	  || htab->elf.srelbss == NULL)
   3468      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3469      1.1     skrll 
   3470      1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (h->root.u.def.value
   3471      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma
   3472      1.1     skrll 		       + h->root.u.def.section->output_offset);
   3473      1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF64_R_INFO (h->dynindx, R_390_COPY);
   3474      1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   3475  1.1.1.6  christos       if (h->root.u.def.section == htab->elf.sdynrelro)
   3476  1.1.1.6  christos 	s = htab->elf.sreldynrelro;
   3477  1.1.1.6  christos       else
   3478  1.1.1.6  christos 	s = htab->elf.srelbss;
   3479  1.1.1.6  christos       loc = s->contents + s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela);
   3480      1.1     skrll       bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   3481      1.1     skrll     }
   3482      1.1     skrll 
   3483      1.1     skrll   /* Mark some specially defined symbols as absolute.  */
   3484  1.1.1.4  christos   if (h == htab->elf.hdynamic
   3485      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hgot
   3486      1.1     skrll       || h == htab->elf.hplt)
   3487      1.1     skrll     sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   3488      1.1     skrll 
   3489      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3490      1.1     skrll }
   3491      1.1     skrll 
   3492      1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   3493      1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   3494      1.1     skrll 
   3495      1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   3496  1.1.1.4  christos elf_s390_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3497  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3498  1.1.1.4  christos 			   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   3499  1.1.1.4  christos {
   3500  1.1.1.4  christos   bfd *abfd = info->output_bfd;
   3501  1.1.1.4  christos   const struct elf_backend_data *bed = get_elf_backend_data (abfd);
   3502  1.1.1.4  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3503  1.1.1.4  christos   unsigned long r_symndx = ELF64_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3504  1.1.1.4  christos   Elf_Internal_Sym sym;
   3505  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3506  1.1.1.4  christos   if (htab->elf.dynsym == NULL
   3507  1.1.1.4  christos       || !bed->s->swap_symbol_in (abfd,
   3508  1.1.1.4  christos 				  (htab->elf.dynsym->contents
   3509  1.1.1.4  christos 				   + r_symndx * bed->s->sizeof_sym),
   3510  1.1.1.4  christos 				  0, &sym))
   3511  1.1.1.4  christos     abort ();
   3512  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3513  1.1.1.4  christos   /* Check relocation against STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol.  */
   3514  1.1.1.4  christos   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym.st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3515  1.1.1.4  christos     return reloc_class_ifunc;
   3516  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3517      1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF64_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   3518      1.1     skrll     {
   3519      1.1     skrll     case R_390_RELATIVE:
   3520      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_relative;
   3521      1.1     skrll     case R_390_JMP_SLOT:
   3522      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   3523      1.1     skrll     case R_390_COPY:
   3524      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   3525      1.1     skrll     default:
   3526      1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   3527      1.1     skrll     }
   3528      1.1     skrll }
   3529      1.1     skrll 
   3530      1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   3531      1.1     skrll 
   3532      1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3533  1.1.1.2  christos elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   3534  1.1.1.2  christos 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3535      1.1     skrll {
   3536      1.1     skrll   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3537      1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   3538      1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   3539  1.1.1.3  christos   bfd *ibfd;
   3540  1.1.1.3  christos   unsigned int i;
   3541      1.1     skrll 
   3542      1.1     skrll   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3543  1.1.1.2  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3544  1.1.1.2  christos     return FALSE;
   3545  1.1.1.2  christos 
   3546      1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->elf.dynobj;
   3547  1.1.1.3  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   3548      1.1     skrll 
   3549      1.1     skrll   if (htab->elf.dynamic_sections_created)
   3550      1.1     skrll     {
   3551      1.1     skrll       Elf64_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   3552      1.1     skrll 
   3553  1.1.1.3  christos       if (sdyn == NULL || htab->elf.sgot == NULL)
   3554      1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   3555      1.1     skrll 
   3556      1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   3557      1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf64_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   3558      1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   3559      1.1     skrll 	{
   3560      1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   3561      1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   3562      1.1     skrll 
   3563      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   3564      1.1     skrll 
   3565      1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   3566      1.1     skrll 	    {
   3567      1.1     skrll 	    default:
   3568      1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   3569      1.1     skrll 
   3570      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   3571  1.1.1.5  christos 	      s = htab->elf.sgotplt;
   3572  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   3573      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3574      1.1     skrll 
   3575      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   3576  1.1.1.5  christos 	      s = htab->elf.srelplt;
   3577  1.1.1.5  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   3578      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3579      1.1     skrll 
   3580      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   3581  1.1.1.6  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = htab->elf.srelplt->size;
   3582  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (htab->elf.irelplt)
   3583  1.1.1.6  christos 		dyn.d_un.d_val += htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3584      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3585      1.1     skrll 
   3586      1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELASZ:
   3587      1.1     skrll 	      /* The procedure linkage table relocs (DT_JMPREL) should
   3588      1.1     skrll 		 not be included in the overall relocs (DT_RELA).
   3589      1.1     skrll 		 Therefore, we override the DT_RELASZ entry here to
   3590      1.1     skrll 		 make it not include the JMPREL relocs.  Since the
   3591      1.1     skrll 		 linker script arranges for .rela.plt to follow all
   3592      1.1     skrll 		 other relocation sections, we don't have to worry
   3593      1.1     skrll 		 about changing the DT_RELA entry.  */
   3594  1.1.1.6  christos 	      dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.srelplt->size;
   3595  1.1.1.6  christos 	      if (htab->elf.irelplt)
   3596  1.1.1.6  christos 		dyn.d_un.d_val -= htab->elf.irelplt->size;
   3597      1.1     skrll 	      break;
   3598      1.1     skrll 	    }
   3599      1.1     skrll 
   3600      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   3601      1.1     skrll 	}
   3602      1.1     skrll 
   3603      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the special first entry in the procedure linkage table.  */
   3604  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.splt && htab->elf.splt->size > 0)
   3605      1.1     skrll 	{
   3606      1.1     skrll 	  /* fill in blueprint for plt 0 entry */
   3607  1.1.1.3  christos 	  memcpy (htab->elf.splt->contents, elf_s390x_first_plt_entry,
   3608  1.1.1.3  christos 		  PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE);
   3609      1.1     skrll 	  /* Fixup relative address to start of GOT */
   3610      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3611  1.1.1.5  christos 		      (htab->elf.sgotplt->output_section->vma
   3612  1.1.1.5  christos 		       + htab->elf.sgotplt->output_offset
   3613  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_section->vma
   3614  1.1.1.5  christos 		       - htab->elf.splt->output_offset - 6)/2,
   3615  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.splt->contents + 8);
   3616      1.1     skrll 	}
   3617  1.1.1.4  christos       if (elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section) != NULL)
   3618  1.1.1.4  christos 	elf_section_data (htab->elf.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize
   3619  1.1.1.4  christos 	  = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3620      1.1     skrll     }
   3621      1.1     skrll 
   3622  1.1.1.3  christos   if (htab->elf.sgotplt)
   3623      1.1     skrll     {
   3624      1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first three entries in the global offset table.  */
   3625  1.1.1.3  christos       if (htab->elf.sgotplt->size > 0)
   3626      1.1     skrll 	{
   3627      1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd,
   3628      1.1     skrll 		      (sdyn == NULL ? (bfd_vma) 0
   3629      1.1     skrll 		       : sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset),
   3630  1.1.1.3  christos 		      htab->elf.sgotplt->contents);
   3631      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for shared object struct ptr.  */
   3632  1.1.1.3  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + 8);
   3633      1.1     skrll 	  /* One entry for _dl_runtime_resolve.  */
   3634  1.1.1.5  christos 	  bfd_put_64 (output_bfd, (bfd_vma) 0, htab->elf.sgotplt->contents + 16);
   3635      1.1     skrll 	}
   3636      1.1     skrll 
   3637  1.1.1.3  christos       elf_section_data (htab->elf.sgot->output_section)
   3638      1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 8;
   3639      1.1     skrll     }
   3640  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3641  1.1.1.3  christos   /* Finish dynamic symbol for local IFUNC symbols.  */
   3642  1.1.1.4  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   3643  1.1.1.3  christos     {
   3644  1.1.1.3  christos       struct plt_entry *local_plt;
   3645  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   3646  1.1.1.3  christos       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3647  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3648  1.1.1.3  christos       symtab_hdr = &elf_symtab_hdr (ibfd);
   3649  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3650  1.1.1.6  christos       if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd))
   3651  1.1.1.6  christos 	continue;
   3652  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3653  1.1.1.3  christos       local_plt = elf_s390_local_plt (ibfd);
   3654  1.1.1.3  christos       if (local_plt != NULL)
   3655  1.1.1.3  christos 	for (i = 0; i < symtab_hdr->sh_info; i++)
   3656  1.1.1.3  christos 	  {
   3657  1.1.1.3  christos 	    if (local_plt[i].plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   3658  1.1.1.3  christos 	      {
   3659  1.1.1.3  christos 		asection *sec = local_plt[i].sec;
   3660  1.1.1.3  christos 		isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache, ibfd, i);
   3661  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (isym == NULL)
   3662  1.1.1.3  christos 		  return FALSE;
   3663  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3664  1.1.1.3  christos 		if (ELF_ST_TYPE (isym->st_info) == STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   3665  1.1.1.3  christos 		  elf_s390_finish_ifunc_symbol (output_bfd, info, NULL, htab,
   3666  1.1.1.3  christos 						local_plt[i].plt.offset,
   3667  1.1.1.3  christos 						isym->st_value
   3668  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_section->vma
   3669  1.1.1.3  christos 						+ sec->output_offset);
   3670  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3671  1.1.1.3  christos 	      }
   3672  1.1.1.3  christos 	  }
   3673  1.1.1.3  christos     }
   3674  1.1.1.3  christos 
   3675      1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3676      1.1     skrll }
   3677  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3678  1.1.1.6  christos /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   3680  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3681  1.1.1.6  christos static bfd_boolean
   3682  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   3683  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3684  1.1.1.6  christos   int offset;
   3685  1.1.1.6  christos   size_t size;
   3686  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3687  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note->descsz)
   3688  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3689  1.1.1.6  christos     default:
   3690  1.1.1.6  christos       return FALSE;
   3691  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3692  1.1.1.6  christos     case 336:			/* sizeof(struct elf_prstatus) on s390x */
   3693  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_cursig */
   3694  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   3695  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3696  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_pid */
   3697  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 32);
   3698  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3699  1.1.1.6  christos       /* pr_reg */
   3700  1.1.1.6  christos       offset = 112;
   3701  1.1.1.6  christos       size = 216;
   3702  1.1.1.6  christos       break;
   3703  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3704  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3705  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   3706  1.1.1.6  christos   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   3707  1.1.1.6  christos 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   3708  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3709  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3710  1.1.1.6  christos static bfd_boolean
   3711  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   3712  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3713  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note->descsz)
   3714  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3715  1.1.1.6  christos     default:
   3716  1.1.1.6  christos       return FALSE;
   3717  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3718  1.1.1.6  christos     case 136:			/* sizeof(struct elf_prpsinfo) on s390x */
   3719  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->pid
   3720  1.1.1.6  christos 	= bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   3721  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   3722  1.1.1.6  christos 	= _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 40, 16);
   3723  1.1.1.6  christos       elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   3724  1.1.1.6  christos 	= _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 56, 80);
   3725  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3726  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3727  1.1.1.6  christos   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   3728  1.1.1.6  christos      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   3729  1.1.1.6  christos      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   3730  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3731  1.1.1.6  christos   {
   3732  1.1.1.6  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   3733  1.1.1.6  christos     int n = strlen (command);
   3734  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3735  1.1.1.6  christos     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   3736  1.1.1.6  christos       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   3737  1.1.1.6  christos   }
   3738  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3739  1.1.1.6  christos   return TRUE;
   3740  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3741  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3742  1.1.1.6  christos static char *
   3743  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_write_core_note (bfd *abfd, char *buf, int *bufsiz,
   3744  1.1.1.6  christos 			  int note_type, ...)
   3745  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3746      1.1     skrll   va_list ap;
   3747  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3748  1.1.1.6  christos   switch (note_type)
   3749  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3750  1.1.1.6  christos     default:
   3751  1.1.1.6  christos       return NULL;
   3752  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3753  1.1.1.6  christos     case NT_PRPSINFO:
   3754  1.1.1.7  christos       {
   3755  1.1.1.6  christos 	char data[136] ATTRIBUTE_NONSTRING = { 0 };
   3756  1.1.1.6  christos 	const char *fname, *psargs;
   3757  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3758  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_start (ap, note_type);
   3759  1.1.1.6  christos 	fname = va_arg (ap, const char *);
   3760  1.1.1.6  christos 	psargs = va_arg (ap, const char *);
   3761  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_end (ap);
   3762  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3763  1.1.1.7  christos 	strncpy (data + 40, fname, 16);
   3764  1.1.1.7  christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8001
   3765  1.1.1.7  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_PUSH;
   3766  1.1.1.7  christos 	/* GCC 8.1 warns about 80 equals destination size with
   3767  1.1.1.7  christos 	   -Wstringop-truncation:
   3768  1.1.1.7  christos 	   https://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=85643
   3769  1.1.1.7  christos 	 */
   3770  1.1.1.7  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_IGNORE_STRINGOP_TRUNCATION;
   3771  1.1.1.6  christos #endif
   3772  1.1.1.7  christos 	strncpy (data + 56, psargs, 80);
   3773  1.1.1.7  christos #if GCC_VERSION == 8001
   3774  1.1.1.7  christos 	DIAGNOSTIC_POP;
   3775  1.1.1.6  christos #endif
   3776  1.1.1.6  christos 	return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
   3777  1.1.1.6  christos 				   &data, sizeof (data));
   3778  1.1.1.6  christos       }
   3779  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3780  1.1.1.6  christos     case NT_PRSTATUS:
   3781  1.1.1.6  christos       {
   3782  1.1.1.6  christos 	char data[336] = { 0 };
   3783  1.1.1.6  christos 	long pid;
   3784  1.1.1.6  christos 	int cursig;
   3785  1.1.1.6  christos 	const void *gregs;
   3786  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3787  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_start (ap, note_type);
   3788  1.1.1.6  christos 	pid = va_arg (ap, long);
   3789  1.1.1.6  christos 	cursig = va_arg (ap, int);
   3790  1.1.1.6  christos 	gregs = va_arg (ap, const void *);
   3791  1.1.1.6  christos 	va_end (ap);
   3792  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3793  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_put_16 (abfd, cursig, data + 12);
   3794  1.1.1.6  christos 	bfd_put_32 (abfd, pid, data + 32);
   3795  1.1.1.6  christos 	memcpy (data + 112, gregs, 216);
   3796  1.1.1.6  christos 	return elfcore_write_note (abfd, buf, bufsiz, "CORE", note_type,
   3797  1.1.1.6  christos 				   &data, sizeof (data));
   3798  1.1.1.6  christos       }
   3799  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3800  1.1.1.6  christos   /* NOTREACHED */
   3801  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3802      1.1     skrll 
   3803      1.1     skrll /* Return address for Ith PLT stub in section PLT, for relocation REL
   3805      1.1     skrll    or (bfd_vma) -1 if it should not be included.  */
   3806      1.1     skrll 
   3807      1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3808      1.1     skrll elf_s390_plt_sym_val (bfd_vma i, const asection *plt,
   3809      1.1     skrll 		      const arelent *rel ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   3810      1.1     skrll {
   3811      1.1     skrll   return plt->vma + PLT_FIRST_ENTRY_SIZE + i * PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   3812  1.1.1.4  christos }
   3813  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3814  1.1.1.4  christos /* Merge backend specific data from an object file to the output
   3815  1.1.1.4  christos    object file when linking.  */
   3816  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3817  1.1.1.6  christos static bfd_boolean
   3818  1.1.1.6  christos elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data (bfd *ibfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3819  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3820  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!is_s390_elf (ibfd) || !is_s390_elf (info->output_bfd))
   3821  1.1.1.6  christos     return TRUE;
   3822  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3823  1.1.1.6  christos   return elf_s390_merge_obj_attributes (ibfd, info);
   3824  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3825  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3826  1.1.1.6  christos /* We may add a PT_S390_PGSTE program header.  */
   3827  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3828  1.1.1.6  christos static int
   3829  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_additional_program_headers (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   3830  1.1.1.6  christos 				     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3831  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3832  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3833  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3834  1.1.1.6  christos   if (info)
   3835  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3836  1.1.1.6  christos       htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3837  1.1.1.6  christos       if (htab)
   3838  1.1.1.6  christos 	return htab->params->pgste;
   3839  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3840  1.1.1.6  christos   return 0;
   3841  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3842  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3843  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3844  1.1.1.6  christos /* Add the PT_S390_PGSTE program header.  */
   3845  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3846  1.1.1.4  christos static bfd_boolean
   3847  1.1.1.6  christos elf_s390_modify_segment_map (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3848  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3849  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3850  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_segment_map *m, *pm = NULL;
   3851  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3852  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!abfd || !info)
   3853  1.1.1.6  christos     return TRUE;
   3854  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3855  1.1.1.6  christos   htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3856  1.1.1.6  christos   if (!htab || !htab->params->pgste)
   3857  1.1.1.6  christos     return TRUE;
   3858  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3859  1.1.1.6  christos   /* If there is already a PT_S390_PGSTE header, avoid adding
   3860  1.1.1.6  christos      another.  */
   3861  1.1.1.6  christos   m = elf_seg_map (abfd);
   3862  1.1.1.6  christos   while (m && m->p_type != PT_S390_PGSTE)
   3863  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3864  1.1.1.6  christos       pm = m;
   3865  1.1.1.6  christos       m = m->next;
   3866  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3867  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3868  1.1.1.4  christos   if (m)
   3869  1.1.1.6  christos     return TRUE;
   3870  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3871  1.1.1.6  christos   m = (struct elf_segment_map *)
   3872  1.1.1.4  christos     bfd_zalloc (abfd, sizeof (struct elf_segment_map));
   3873  1.1.1.6  christos   if (m == NULL)
   3874  1.1.1.6  christos     return FALSE;
   3875  1.1.1.6  christos   m->p_type = PT_S390_PGSTE;
   3876  1.1.1.6  christos   m->count = 0;
   3877  1.1.1.6  christos   m->next = NULL;
   3878  1.1.1.4  christos   if (pm)
   3879  1.1.1.4  christos     pm->next = m;
   3880  1.1.1.4  christos 
   3881  1.1.1.4  christos   return TRUE;
   3882  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3883  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3884  1.1.1.6  christos bfd_boolean
   3885  1.1.1.6  christos bfd_elf_s390_set_options (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3886  1.1.1.6  christos 			  struct s390_elf_params *params)
   3887  1.1.1.6  christos {
   3888  1.1.1.6  christos   struct elf_s390_link_hash_table *htab;
   3889  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3890  1.1.1.6  christos   if (info)
   3891  1.1.1.6  christos     {
   3892  1.1.1.6  christos       htab = elf_s390_hash_table (info);
   3893  1.1.1.6  christos       if (htab)
   3894  1.1.1.6  christos 	htab->params = params;
   3895  1.1.1.6  christos     }
   3896  1.1.1.6  christos 
   3897  1.1.1.6  christos   return TRUE;
   3898  1.1.1.6  christos }
   3899      1.1     skrll 
   3900      1.1     skrll 
   3901      1.1     skrll /* Why was the hash table entry size definition changed from
   3902      1.1     skrll    ARCH_SIZE/8 to 4? This breaks the 64 bit dynamic linker and
   3903      1.1     skrll    this is the only reason for the s390_elf64_size_info structure.  */
   3904      1.1     skrll 
   3905      1.1     skrll const struct elf_size_info s390_elf64_size_info =
   3906      1.1     skrll {
   3907      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Ehdr),
   3908      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Phdr),
   3909      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Shdr),
   3910      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rel),
   3911      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Rela),
   3912      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Sym),
   3913      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf64_External_Dyn),
   3914      1.1     skrll   sizeof (Elf_External_Note),
   3915      1.1     skrll   8,		/* hash-table entry size.  */
   3916      1.1     skrll   1,		/* internal relocations per external relocations.  */
   3917      1.1     skrll   64,		/* arch_size.  */
   3918      1.1     skrll   3,		/* log_file_align.  */
   3919      1.1     skrll   ELFCLASS64, EV_CURRENT,
   3920      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_out_phdrs,
   3921      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_shdrs_and_ehdr,
   3922      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_checksum_contents,
   3923      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_write_relocs,
   3924      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_in,
   3925      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_symbol_out,
   3926      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_reloc_table,
   3927      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_slurp_symbol_table,
   3928      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_in,
   3929      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_dyn_out,
   3930      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_in,
   3931      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloc_out,
   3932      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_in,
   3933      1.1     skrll   bfd_elf64_swap_reloca_out
   3934  1.1.1.4  christos };
   3935      1.1     skrll 
   3936      1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM	s390_elf64_vec
   3937  1.1.1.2  christos #define TARGET_BIG_NAME	"elf64-s390"
   3938      1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH	bfd_arch_s390
   3939      1.1     skrll #define ELF_TARGET_ID	S390_ELF_DATA
   3940      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE EM_S390
   3941      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_ALT1 EM_S390_OLD
   3942      1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE 0x1000
   3943      1.1     skrll 
   3944      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_info		s390_elf64_size_info
   3945      1.1     skrll 
   3946      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	1
   3947      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	1
   3948      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	1
   3949      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	1
   3950  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	0
   3951      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	24
   3952      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro	1
   3953      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		1
   3954      1.1     skrll 
   3955      1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		elf_s390_info_to_howto
   3956      1.1     skrll 
   3957      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_is_local_label_name     elf_s390_is_local_label_name
   3958  1.1.1.6  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_link_hash_table_create  elf_s390_link_hash_table_create
   3959  1.1.1.4  christos #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	      elf_s390_reloc_type_lookup
   3960      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_reloc_name_lookup	      elf_s390_reloc_name_lookup
   3961      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_bfd_merge_private_bfd_data  elf64_s390_merge_private_bfd_data
   3962      1.1     skrll 
   3963      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3964  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_check_relocs	      elf_s390_check_relocs
   3965      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol      elf_s390_copy_indirect_symbol
   3966      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections   _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections
   3967      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections   elf_s390_finish_dynamic_sections
   3968      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol     elf_s390_finish_dynamic_symbol
   3969      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	      elf_s390_gc_mark_hook
   3970      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	      elf_s390_reloc_type_class
   3971      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	      elf_s390_relocate_section
   3972  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections     elf_s390_size_dynamic_sections
   3973  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_init_index_section	      _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   3974  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	      elf_s390_grok_prstatus
   3975      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		      elf_s390_grok_psinfo
   3976  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_write_core_note	      elf_s390_write_core_note
   3977  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_plt_sym_val		      elf_s390_plt_sym_val
   3978  1.1.1.6  christos #define elf_backend_sort_relocs_p	      elf_s390_elf_sort_relocs_p
   3979      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_additional_program_headers elf_s390_additional_program_headers
   3980      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_modify_segment_map	      elf_s390_modify_segment_map
   3981      1.1     skrll 
   3982      1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf64_mkobject		elf_s390_mkobject
   3983      1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		elf_s390_object_p
   3984                    
   3985                    #include "elf64-target.h"
   3986